Operator`s manual | Clarion RPNP Plug and Play Receiver Stereo Receiver User Manual

G 500
G 55 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you
on the purchase of your new
Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire to own an automobile that will be as
easy as possible to operate and provide
years of service.
앫
Please follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are designed to acquaint you with the operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Please pay attention to the warnings
and cautions contained in this manual.
They are designed to help improve the
safety of the vehicle operator and occupants.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To help assure your driving pleasure,
and also the safety of you and your passengers, we ask you to make a small investment of time:
We extend our best wishes for many miles
of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9
Product information................................ 9
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10
Service and warranty information .. 10
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11
Maintenance .................................. 12
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12
Change of address or ownership.... 13
Operating your vehicle outside the
USA or Canada............................... 13
Where to find it.................................... 15
Symbols............................................... 16
Operating safety .................................. 17
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17
Problems with your vehicle.................. 18
Reporting safety defects...................... 19
Reporting safety defects ................ 19
At a glance .......................................... 21
Cockpit................................................. 22
Instrument cluster ................................ 24
Multifunction steering wheel ................ 26
Center console ..................................... 27
Upper part ...................................... 27
Lower part ...................................... 28
Overhead control panel ........................ 29
Door control panel................................ 30
Getting started ................................... 31
Unlocking ............................................. 32
Unlocking with the SmartKey.......... 32
Adjusting .............................................. 34
Seats............................................... 34
Steering wheel ................................ 37
Mirrors ............................................ 38
Driving..................................................
Fastening the seat belt ...................
Starting the engine .........................
Switching on headlamps.................
Turn signals and high beam ............
Windshield wipers...........................
Rear window wiper/washer............
Problems while driving....................
Parking and locking..............................
Parking brake .................................
Switching off headlamps.................
Turning off engine...........................
40
40
43
46
46
47
49
50
51
51
52
52
Safety and Security ...........................
Occupant safety ...................................
Airbags ...........................................
Seat belts .......................................
Children in the vehicle ....................
Blocking rear door window
operation ........................................
Panic alarm ..........................................
55
56
57
62
65
71
73
Contents
Driving and safety systems ..................
ABS ................................................
BAS ................................................
4-ETS..............................................
EBB.................................................
ESP.................................................
Anti-theft systems................................
Immobilizer.....................................
Anti-theft alarm ..............................
Tow-away alarm .............................
74
74
76
77
78
78
82
82
82
83
Controls in detail ...............................
Locking and unlocking .........................
SmartKey .......................................
Opening the doors from the inside .
Opening the tailgate .......................
Closing the tailgate ........................
Separately locking the tailgate .......
Separately unlocking the tailgate ...
Automatic central locking ..............
Locking and unlocking from
the inside .......................................
85
86
86
89
89
90
90
91
91
92
Seats ................................................... 94
Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 94
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints............................... 95
Synchronizing head restraints and
seat adjustment fore and aft for
front seats...................................... 95
Rear seat head restraints ............... 96
Multicontour seat*......................... 97
Heated seats.................................. 98
Memory function ............................... 101
Storing positions into memory ..... 102
Recalling positions from memory . 102
Storing exterior rear view mirror
parking position ........................... 103
Lighting.............................................. 104
Exterior lamp switch..................... 104
Combination switch ..................... 107
Hazard warning flasher ................ 108
Interior lighting............................. 109
Rear interior lamps....................... 110
Cargo compartment lamps........... 110
Instrument cluster .............................
Instrument cluster illumination ....
Coolant temperature display........
Trip odometer ..............................
Tachometer..................................
Outside temperature indicator .....
Control system ..................................
Multifunction display....................
Multifunction steering wheel........
Menus ..........................................
Standard display menu ................
AUDIO menu ................................
NAVI menu...................................
Malfunction memory menu ..........
Settings menu..............................
Trip computer menu.....................
TEL menu .....................................
Automatic transmission.....................
One-touch gearshifting ................
Gear ranges .................................
Gear selector lever position .........
Accelerator position.....................
Emergency operation
(Limp Home Mode) ......................
112
112
112
113
113
114
115
115
116
118
120
120
122
122
123
136
137
140
141
142
142
144
144
Contents
Transfer case.....................................
Gear range ...................................
Switching transfer case................
Differential locks ...............................
A few words about differentials
and differential locks....................
Switching differential locks
on and off.....................................
Good visibility ....................................
Rear view mirror...........................
Headlamp cleaning system ..........
Sun visors ....................................
Rear window defroster .................
Climate control ..................................
Setting the temperature...............
Adjusting air distribution and
volume .........................................
Defrosting ....................................
Air recirculation............................
Residual engine heat utilization....
Deactivating the climate control
system .........................................
Air conditioning............................
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents......................
145
145
145
148
149
150
152
152
153
154
155
156
158
159
160
160
161
162
162
163
Power windows .................................. 164
Opening and closing the windows. 164
Sliding/pop-up roof............................ 166
Opening and closing the
sliding/pop-up roof....................... 166
Driving systems .................................. 169
Cruise control ............................... 169
Rear Parking Assist* ..................... 172
Loading............................................... 175
Roof rack ...................................... 175
Cargo compartment cover ............ 175
Enlarged cargo compartment........ 176
Split rear seat bench..................... 176
Partition net* (MB Accessory) ...... 178
Loading instructions ..................... 180
Cargo tie-down rings..................... 182
Useful features ................................... 183
Interior storage spaces ................. 183
Ashtrays........................................ 186
Cigarette lighter............................ 188
Electrical outlet............................. 188
Telephone* ................................... 189
Tele Aid......................................... 190
Garage door opener...................... 198
Heated steering wheel .................. 203
Operation.......................................... 205
The first 1000 miles (1500 km).......... 206
Driving instructions ............................ 207
Drive sensibly – save fuel ............. 207
Drinking and driving...................... 207
Pedals........................................... 207
Power assistance.......................... 208
Brakes .......................................... 208
Driving off ..................................... 209
Parking ......................................... 209
Tires.............................................. 210
Hydroplaning ................................ 210
Tire traction .................................. 211
Tire speed rating........................... 211
Winter driving instructions............ 212
Standing water ............................. 213
Passenger compartment............... 213
Off-road driving............................. 213
Control and operation of radio
transmitters .................................. 221
Driving abroad .............................. 222
Catalytic converter ....................... 222
Emission control ........................... 222
Coolant temperature .................... 223
Contents
At the gas station...............................
Refueling ......................................
Check regularly and before
a long trip .....................................
Engine compartment..........................
Hood ............................................
Engine oil......................................
Transmission fluid level ................
Coolant level ................................
Windshield/rear window washer
system and headlamp cleaning
system..........................................
Battery ...............................................
Tires and wheels ................................
Important guidelines ....................
Life of tire.....................................
Direction of rotation .....................
Checking tire inflation pressure ...
Rotating wheels............................
Winter driving.....................................
Winter tires...................................
Block heater (Canada only) ..........
Snow chains .................................
224
224
225
227
227
228
232
232
234
235
236
236
237
237
237
238
240
240
240
241
Maintenance......................................
Clearing the service indicator ......
Service term exceeded ................
Calling up the service indicator ....
Resetting the service indicator.....
Vehicle care.......................................
Cleaning and care of the vehicle ..
Practical hints..................................
What to do if … ..................................
Lamps in instrument cluster ........
Lamp in center console................
Messages in the multifunction
display..........................................
Where will I find ...? ...........................
First aid kit ...................................
Vehicle tool kit .............................
Vehicle jack..................................
CD changer ..................................
Spare wheel .................................
242
242
242
243
243
244
244
251
252
252
259
260
283
283
283
284
284
285
Unlocking/locking in an emergency..
Unlocking the vehicle...................
Locking the vehicle ......................
Changing batteries in
the SmartKey ...............................
Fuel filler flap ...............................
Manually unlocking the
transmission gear selector lever ..
Opening/closing in an emergency ....
Sliding/pop-up roof .....................
Brush guard* .....................................
Lowering and raising brush guard
Replacing bulbs .................................
Bulbs............................................
Replacing bulbs for front lamps ...
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ....
Replacing wiper blades......................
Removing wiper blades ................
Installing wiper blades .................
Flat tire ..............................................
Preparing the vehicle ...................
Mounting the spare wheel ...........
287
287
288
288
290
290
292
292
293
294
295
295
297
301
304
304
305
306
306
307
Contents
Battery...............................................
Charging the battery ....................
Disconnecting the battery............
Reconnecting the battery.............
Jump starting .....................................
Towing the vehicle .............................
Transporting the vehicle...............
Towing the vehicle various problem scenarios ...........
Front towing eye ..........................
Rear towing eye ...........................
Freeing a stranded vehicle ...........
Fuses .................................................
Fuse box in passenger
compartment ...............................
Fuse box in battery box................
Fuse box in front passenger
footwell ........................................
Fuse box in middle tunnel ............
311
311
312
312
313
315
317
317
318
318
318
319
319
319
320
321
Technical data .................................. 323
Spare parts service............................. 324
Warranty coverage ............................. 325
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet ...................... 325
Identification labels ............................ 326
Layout of poly-V-belt drive.................. 327
G 500/G 55 AMG ......................... 327
Engine ................................................ 328
Rims and tires .................................... 329
Rims and Tires ............................. 329
Spare wheels ................................ 330
Electrical system ................................ 331
Main dimensions, vehicle weights
and ratings ......................................... 332
Main dimensions........................... 332
Vehicle weights and ratings .......... 332
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc........... 333
Capacities..................................... 333
Engine oils .................................... 334
Engine oil additives....................... 335
Air conditioning refrigerant........... 335
Brake fluid .................................... 335
Premium unleaded gasoline.......... 335
Fuel requirements......................... 336
Gasoline additives......................... 336
Coolants ....................................... 336
Anticorrosion/antifreeze .............. 337
Windshield/rear window washer
system and headlamp cleaning
system .......................................... 339
Consumer information........................ 340
Uniform tire quality grading .......... 340
Technical terms ............................... 343
Index ................................................. 349
Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own
best interest:
We recommend using genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts as well as conversion
parts and accessories explicitly approved
by us for your vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine
their reliability, safety and special suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
We are unable to make an assessment for
other products and therefore cannot be
held responsible for them, even if in individual cases an official approval or authorization by governmental or other agencies
should exist. Use of such parts and accessories could adversely affect the safety,
performance or reliability of your vehicle.
Please do not use them.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz original parts as
well as conversion parts and accessories
approved by us are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
where you will receive comprehensive information, also on permissible technical
modifications, and where proper installation will be performed.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
왔 Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great
deal of useful information. We urge you to
read it carefully and familiarize yourself
with the vehicle before driving.
For your own safety and longer service life
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the instructions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you
or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual.
Therefore, you may find explanations for
optional equipment not installed in your
vehicle. If you have any questions about
the operation of any equipment, your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be glad to demonstrate the proper
procedures.
10
We continuously strive to improve our
product, and ask for your understanding
that we reserve the right to make changes
in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in
this Operator’s Manual might differ from
your vehicle.
Service and warranty information
앫
New Light Truck Limited Warranty,
Optional equipment is also described in
this manual, including operating instructions wherever necessary. Since they are
special-order items, the descriptions and
illustrations herein may vary slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
앫
Emission System Warranty,
앫
Emission Performance Warranty,
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control System
Warranty
(California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont only),
앫
State Warranty Enforcement Laws
(Lemon Laws).
If there are any equipment details that are
not shown or described in this Operator’s
Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center will be glad to inform
you of correct care and operating procedures.
The Operator’s Manual and Service Booklet are important documents and should be
kept with the vehicle.
The Service and Warranty Information
Booklet contains detailed information
about the warranties covering your
Mercedes-Benz, including:
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California
retail buyers and lessees of
Mercedes-Benz automobiles
Under California law you may be entitled to
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund
of the purchase price or lease price, if
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix
one or more substantial defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by
its express warranty after a reasonable
number of repair attempts. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair attempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect or malfunction has been subject to
repair two or more times, and you have
directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly notified us in writing of the need for
its repair, or
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
of repair of the same or different substantial defects or malfunctions for a
cumulative total of more than
30 calender days. Written notification
should be sent to us, not a dealer, at
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC, Customer
Assistance Center, One Mercedes
Drive, Montvale, NJ 07645-0350.
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance
Roadside Assistance
The Service Booklet describes all the necessary maintenance work which should be
performed at regular intervals.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
Program provides factory-trained technical
help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
Always have the Service Booklet with you
when you take the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for service. The service advisor will record
each service in the booklet for you.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in accordance with standard program guidelines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, however, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center technician or the tow service provider on a case
by case basis and may be a factor in our
ability to respond.
12
Additional charges may be applicable for a
breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
determined by our authorized technician
and tow service provider.
For additional information refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program Brochure in your glove box.
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Change of address or ownership
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice”
found in the Service and Warranty Information Booklet, or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MER-Cedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in
your own interest that we can contact you
should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
literature with the vehicle to make it available to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign countries, please be aware that:
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available for delivery in Europe under our European Delivery Program. For details, consult
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
write to:
앫
service facilities or replacement parts
may not be readily available,
In the USA:
앫
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with catalytic converters may not be available;
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
catalysts,
앫
gasoline may have a considerably lower octane rating, and improper fuel can
cause engine damage.
Operating your vehicle outside the USA
or Canada
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario M4G 2L5
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Warning!
G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you
make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.
14
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to provide comprehensive support information
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section
has its own reference color so you can find
information quickly.
At a glance
Here you will find an overview of all the
controls that can be operated from the
driver’s seat.
Controls in detail
Technical data
Here you will find detailed information
about the equipment installed on your vehicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes technical innovations. If you are already familiar
with the basic functions of your vehicle,
this section will be of particular interest to
you.
All important technical data for your vehicle can be found in this section.
Operation
Getting started
Here you will find all the information you
need for your first drive. You should read
this section first if this is your first
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are renting or borrowing this vehicle.
Safety and Security
Here you will find all the information you
need for the proper operation of your vehicle.
Practical hints
This section provides fast assistance for
dealing with problems you may encounter.
Indexes
The glossary provides explanations of the
most important technical terms.
The table of contents and the index are designed to help you find information quickly
and easily.
The following publications are part of your
vehicle documentation:
앫
this Operator’s Manual
앫
the Service Booklet
Separate operating instructions will be
provided as required depending on the
equipment options installed in your vehicle.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
features of your vehicle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
왔 Symbols
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
*
Optional equipment is identified
with an asterisk. Since standard
equipment varies between models,
the descriptions and illustrations in
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehicle.
Warning!
G
Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
왘
This symbol points to instructions for
you to follow.
왘
A number of these symbols appearing
in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
컄
Page
!
Highlights hazards that may result in
damage to your vehicle.
컄컄
This continuation symbol marks
an interrupted procedure which
will be continued on the next
page.
->
In the glossary of technical
terms, this symbol is used to indicate cross-references to term
definitions.
Display
Words appearing in the multifunction display are printed in
the type shown here.
i
Helpful hints or further information you
may find useful.
16
This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
topic.
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Warning!
G
Work improperly carried out on electronic
components and associated software could
cause them to cease functioning. Because
the vehicle’s electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may
produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could seriously impair the operating safety of your
vehicle.
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to
electronic components.
Other improper work or modifications on the
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Some safety systems only function while the
engine is running. You should therefore never turn off the engine while driving.
Warning!
G
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody
or tires/wheels, for example when running
over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
may cause serious damage and impair the
operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a
sudden significant vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage to your
vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow
down, and drive with caution to an area
which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the vehicle underbody and
tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance
or repair facility for further inspection or repairs.
Proper use of the vehicle
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
are familiar with the following information
and rules:
앫
the safety precautions in this manual
앫
the “Technical data” section in this
manual
앫
traffic rules and regulations
앫
motor vehicle laws and safety standards
Warning!
G
Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle. These warning labels are intended
to make you and others aware of various
risks. You should not remove any of these
warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
do so by information on the label itself. Removal of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or personal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
왔 Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If
the matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management,
or if necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
849 Eglinton Avenue East
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 2L5
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or
write to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.
19
20
At a glance
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Cockpit
왔 Cockpit
22
At a glance
Cockpit
Item
Page
1 Combination switch
Item
6 Starter switch
Page
33
앫
Turn signals
46
7 Glove box
183
앫
Windshield wipers
47
앫
High beam
46
8 Multifunction steering
wheel
26,
116,
203
2 Headlamp cleaning system
153
3 Cruise control lever
169
4 Instrument cluster
24
5 Lever for voice control system*, see separate operating instructions
9 Horn
a Steering wheel adjustment
stalk
37,
203
b Exterior lamp switch
46,
104
c Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment
38
23
At a glance
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
24
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item
Page
1 Reset button for:
앫
Resetting trip odometer
앫
Resetting individual or
all settings
113
Item
4 K Right turn signal indicator lamp
Page
24
Item
Page
7 Speedometer
8 Tachometer with:
5 Fuel gauge with:
Fuel reserve warning lamp
24
; Brake warning lamp
(USA only)
44,
254
60,
258
3 Brake warning lamp
(Canada only)
44,
254
112
1 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
indicator lamp
- ABS indicator lamp
24
62,
258
74,
252
2 L Left turn signal indicator lamp
< Seat belt non-usage
warning lamp
3 ? Engine malfunction
indicator lamp
256
앫
Instrument cluster illumination
123,
125,
137,
243
6 Multifunction display
with:
115
Trip odometer
24
v Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) warning lamp
78,
257
Main odometer
24
145
A High beam headlamp indicator
47,
108
Transfer case program
mode
Gear selector lever position
140
Outside temperature indicator
114
Clock (see COMAND operating instructions)
115
25
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
왔 Multifunction steering wheel
Item
1 Multifunction display in
speedometer
Operating control system:
Item
115
4 Menu systems: Press button
116
è for next system
ÿ for previous system
2 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume
5 Moving within a menu:
Press button
ç down/ to decrease
j for next display
æ up / to increase
3 Telephone*: Press button
í to take a call
ì to end a call
26
Page
k for previous display
Page
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part
Item
Page
Item
1 Left front seat heater
switch
98
8 Hazard warning flasher
switch
2 Switch for rear window
wiper/washer
49
3 ESP control switch
79
9 COMAND system, see separate operating instructions
4 Differential lock switches
150
5 Central locking switch
92
6 Anti-theft alarm system indicator lamp
82
Tow-away alarm switch
83
7 Right front seat heater
switch
98
Page
108
a Ashtray with lighter
186,
188
b Climate control
156
c
7 indicator lamp
68,
259
27
At a glance
Center console
Lower part
Item
Page
1 Storage tray
2 Gear selector lever for
automatic transmission
43,
140
3 Transfer case switch
145
4 Parking brake
28
44,
51
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item
Page
Item
Page
1 Tele Aid (emergency call
system)
190
6 Signal transmitter keys for
garage door opener
198
2 Cargo compartment lamps
110
198
3 Right front reading lamp
109
7 Indicator lamp for garage
door opener
4 Sliding/pop-up roof
166
8 Interior lighting control
109
38
9 Left front reading lamp
109
5 Interior rear view mirror
29
At a glance
Door control panel
왔 Door control panel
Item
1 Switches for opening/closing power window
Switch for rear door window override
164
71
2 Seat adjustment
34,
94
3 Door handle
89
4 Memory function (for storing seat, exterior mirrors
and steering wheel settings)
30
Page
101
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
31
Getting started
Unlocking
왔 Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an
overview of the vehicle’s most basic functions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the information given here.
Unlocking with the SmartKey
Press unlock button Πon the
SmartKey.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
왘
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions described here, the “Controls in
detail” section will help you with further information. The corresponding page references are at the end of each segment.
Get in the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 86).
SmartKey with remote control
1 ‹ Lock button
2 ΠUnlock button
3 Â Panic button (컄 page 73)
32
왘
Getting started
Unlocking
Starter switch positions
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Starter switch
0 For removing SmartKey
The steering is locked when the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch. If necessary, move steering
wheel slightly to allow the locking
mechanism to engage.
1 Power supply to some electrical consumers, such as seat adjustment
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
i
The SmartKey can only be removed
from the starter switch with the gear
selector lever in position P.
!
If the SmartKey cannot be turned, the
battery may not be sufficiently
charged.
앫
Check the battery and charge it if
necessary (컄 page 311).
앫
Get a jump start (컄 page 313).
To prevent accelerated battery discharge and a possible dead battery, always remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch when the engine is not in
operation.
33
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning!
G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fastening of seat belts, must be done before
the vehicle is put into motion.
Never place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
Seats
Warning!
G
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
back reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or fatal injuries.
34
The seat back and seat belts provide the
best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and belts are properly positioned on the body. Your seat must be
adjusted so that you can correctly fasten
your seat belt (컄 page 40).
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle.
The power seats can also be operated with
the driver’s or front passenger door open.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in the back seats and be seated in
an appropriate infant or child restraint system, which is properly secured with the vehicle’s seat belt and top tether strap, or
secured via lower anchors and top tether
strap, fully in accordance with the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
Getting started
Adjusting
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2 (컄 page 33).
or
왘
Open the driver’s or front passenger
door.
Seat adjustment
Seat fore and aft adjustment
The seat adjustment switches are located
in each front door.
왘
Press the switch forward or back in the
direction of arrow 3.
Adjust to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
position should be as far to the rear as
possible, consistent with ability to
properly operate controls.
i
When moving the seat, be sure that
앫
there are no items in the footwell or
behind the seats
앫
the cup holder next to the armrest
is removed (컄 page 185)
앫
the cup holder in the front passenger footwell is folded closed
(컄 page 185)
Otherwise you could damage the seats
and/or cup holders.
The memory function (컄 page 101) lets
you store the setting for the seat position together with the setting for the
steering wheel and the exterior rear
view mirrors.
1 Head restraint height
2 Seat backrest tilt
3 Seat fore and aft adjustment
4 Seat cushion tilt
5 Seat height
35
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt
Head restraint height
왘
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 4 until your upper
legs are lightly supported.
Seat backrest tilt
왘
Press the switch forward or backward
in the direction of arrow 2 until your
arms are slightly angled when holding
the steering wheel.
Seat height
왘
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 5.
Make sure you have sufficient headroom.
Head restraint tilt
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow 1.
Warning!
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Adjust head restraint to support the back
of the head approximately at eye level.
36
Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint.
왘
Push or pull on the upper edge of the
head restraint cushion.
For more information, see “Seats”
(컄 page 94).
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel
Warning!
The stalk is located on the steering column
(lower left).
Adjusting steering column in or out
왘
G
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or driving without the adjustment
locked could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle.
The steering wheel adjustment feature can
also be operated with the driver’s door
open. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Move stalk forward or back in the direction of arrow 1 until a comfortable
steering wheel position is reached with
your arms slightly bent at the elbow.
Adjusting steering column up or down
왘
1 Adjusting steering column, in or out
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down
왘
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2 (컄 page 33).
or
Open the driver’s door.
Move stalk up or down in the direction
of arrow 2.
Make sure your legs can move freely
and that all the displays (incl. malfunction and indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster are clearly visible.
i
The memory function (컄 page 101) lets
you store the setting for the steering
wheel together with the setting for the
seat position and the exterior rear view
mirrors.
For more information, see “Heated steering wheel” (컄 page 203).
37
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors
Interior rear view mirror
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic conditions.
Warning!
G
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape the mirror housing if the mirror
glass breaks.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
!
Electrolyte drops coming into contact
with the vehicle paint finish can only be
completely removed while in their liquid state and by applying plenty of water.
38
왘
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror.
The buttons are located above the exterior
lamp switch.
Exterior rear view mirror
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your interior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
1 Adjustment button
2 Driver’s side mirror
3 Passenger-side mirror
Getting started
Adjusting
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
i
All the lights in the instrument cluster
come on.
The memory function (컄 page 101) lets
you store the setting for the exterior
rear view mirrors together with the setting for the steering wheel and the seat
position.
왘
Press button 2 for driver’s side exterior rear view mirror or button 3 for
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
왘
Push adjustment button 1 up, down,
left or right according to the setting desired.
!
If an exterior rear view mirror housing
is forcibly pushed forward or rearward,
reposition it by applying firm pressure
until it snaps into place. The exterior
rear view mirror housing is now properly positioned and you can adjust the
mirror normally.
For more information, see “Storing exterior
rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 103).
39
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning!
G
Do not lay any objects in the driver’s footwell. Be careful that floor mats or carpets in
the driver’s footwell have sufficient clearance for the pedals.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the objects could get caught between
the pedals. You could then no longer brake
or accelerate.
Fastening the seat belt
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
Warning!
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM1
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury will result.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
seat belt. The airbags can only protect as expected if the occupants are using their seat
belts (컄 page 56).
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle's
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
1
40
G
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Getting started
Driving
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Warning!
Warning!
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively
reclined position can be dangerous. You
could slide under the seat belt in a collision.
If you slide under it, the belt would apply
force at the abdomen or neck. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. The seat
backrest and seat belt provide the best restraint when the wearer is in an upright position and the belt is properly positioned on
the body.
G
Warning!
G
Read and observe the additional warning notices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 60) and (컄 page 62).
1 Latch plate
2 Buckle
3 Release button
왘
With a smooth motion, pull the belt
from the belt outlet.
왘
Place the belt over your shoulder.
왘
Push latch plate 1 into buckle 2 until
컄컄
it clicks.
41
Getting started
Driving
컄컄왘
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Proper use of seat belts
앫
Do not twist the belt when fastening.
앫
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
portion is located as close as possible
to the middle of the shoulder (it should
not touch the neck or pass under the
arm). For this purpose, you can adjust
the height of the belt outlet, see below.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫
Place the seat backrest in a nearly upright position.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time.
앫
Do not fasten a seat belt around a person and another object at the same
time.
42
앫
Check your seat belt during travel to
ensure it is properly positioned.
앫
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
snugly. You should avoid wearing bulky
clothing, such as winter coats, when
traveling in the vehicle.
Warning!
Seat belt height adjustment
Adjust the height so that the upper part of
the belt runs over the middle of the shoulder.
G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effectiveness of the belts.
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
1 Button for belt outlet height adjustment
Getting started
Driving
Adjusting belt outlet higher
왘
Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Slide belt outlet upward.
The belt outlet engages in five various
positions.
Adjusting belt outlet lower
왘
Press and hold release button 1.
왘
Slide belt outlet in desired position.
왘
Let go of release button 1.
Please comply with the instructions for
“Proper use of seat belts” (컄 page 42).
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as garage) which are not properly ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas fumes
are entering the vehicle while driving, have
the cause determined and corrected immediately. If you must drive under these conditions, drive only with at least one window
fully open.
Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
P Park position with gear selector lever
lock
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 140).
43
Getting started
Driving
Starting
Starting difficulties
왘
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
If the engine does not start as described,
carry out the following steps:
왘
Do not depress accelerator.
왘
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 3 and hold until the engine
starts (컄 page 33).
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 0 and repeat starting procedure.
왘
Remember that extended starting attempts can drain the battery.
왘
Get a jump start (컄 page 313).
i
You can also use the “touch-start”
function. Turn the SmartKey to
position 3 and release it again immediately. The engine then starts automatically.
왘
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts, there could be a malfunction in the engine electronics or in the
fuel supply system.
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever lock is released.
For information on turning off the engine,
see “Turning off engine” (컄 page 52).
44
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Parking brake
1 Lever
2 Button
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could release the parking brake,
which could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Getting started
Driving
왘
!
Release the parking brake by lifting
lever 1 up slightly, pressing button 2
on the lever and moving lever 1 down
to the stop.
In order to avoid damaging the transmission,
앫
The warning lamp ; (USA only) or
3 (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster goes out.
앫
Driving
왘
Depress the brake pedal.
왘
Move gear selector lever to position D
or R.
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector lever out of P or N if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
wait for the gear selection process
to complete before setting the vehicle in motion.
place the gear selector lever in
position R only when the vehicle is
stopped.
왘
Release the brake pedal.
왘
Carefully depress the accelerator.
Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic central locking system engages
and the locking knobs drop down.
!
If you hear a warning signal when driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
After a cold start, the automatic transmission shifts at a higher revolution. This allows the catalytic converter to reach its
operating temperature earlier.
!
Do not run cold engine at high engine
speeds. Running a a cold engine at high
engine speeds may shorten the service
life of the engine.
i
You can open the doors from inside at
any time. Open doors only when the
conditions are safe to do so.
You can deactivate the automatic
locking using the control system
(컄 page 133).
!
Simultaneously depressing the accelerator pedal and applying the brake reduces engine performance and causes
premature brake and drivetrain wear.
45
Getting started
Driving
Warning!
G
Switching on headlamps
Turn signals and high beam
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
For more information, see “Driving instructions” (컄 page 207).
For information on off-road driving, see
“Off-road driving” (컄 page 213).
Exterior lamp switch
1 Off
2 Low beam headlamps on
왘
Turn the switch to B.
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 104).
Combination switch
1 Turn signals, right
2 Turn signals, left
왘
Press combination switch up 1 or
down 2.
The switch is automatically canceled
when the steering wheel is turned a
sufficient degree.
46
Getting started
Driving
i
To signal minor directional changes,
move combination switch to point of
resistance only and release. The turn
signal blinks three times.
Windshield wipers
The combination switch is located on the
left of the steering column.
Switching on windshield wipers
왘
Turn the combination switch to the desired position depending on the intensity of the rain.
0 Windshield wipers off
High beam
I
왘
Push the combination switch forward.
II Normal wiper speed
The high beam headlamp
indicator A in the instrument cluster comes on.
III Fast wiper speed
For more information, see “High beam
flasher” (컄 page 108).
Intermittent wiping
i
Combination switch
1 Single wipe
2 Switching on windshield wipers
왘
The intermittent wiping interval depends on the wetness of the windshield. Wiping will not occur with a
front door open.
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
47
Getting started
Driving
!
Single wipe
!
Do not leave windshield wipers in intermittent setting when vehicle is taken to
an automatic car wash or during windshield cleaning. Wipers will operate in
the presence of water sprayed on the
windshield, and wipers may be damaged as a result.
왘
If anything blocks the windshield wipers (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
The switch should not be left in intermittent setting as the wipers will wipe
the windshield once every time the engine is started. Dust that accumulates
on the windshield might scratch the
glass and/or damage the wiper blades
when wiping occurs on a dry windshield.
48
Press switch briefly in the direction of
arrow 1.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
앫
For safety reasons, withdraw
SmartKey from starter switch before attempting to remove any
blockage.
앫
Remove blockage.
앫
Turn the windshield wipers on
again.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
왘
Push switch in the direction of
arrow 1 past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid until the switch is released.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system” (컄 page 234).
If windshield wipers fail to function at
all in switch position I,
앫
set the combination switch to the
next highest wiper speed
앫
have the windshield wipers
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
Getting started
Driving
Rear window wiper/washer
The rear window wiper/washer switch is
located on the upper part of the center
console.
왘
i
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
The rear window wiper will also automatically engage if
왘
앫
the windshield wipers are engaged
앫
the gear selector lever is placed
in R “Reverse”
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Interval wiping
Press and hold lower half 3 of the
switch.
The wiper operates with washer fluid.
The rear window will be wiped for approximately another five seconds after
the switch is released.
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system” (컄 page 234).
Switching on
왘
1 Interval wiping on/off
2 Indicator lamp
3 Simultaneous operation of wiper and
washer
Press upper half 1 of the switch.
The indicator lamp 2 comes on.
Switching off
왘
Press upper half 1 of the switch
again.
The indicator lamp 2 goes out.
49
Getting started
Driving
Problems while driving
The coolant temperature is over 248°F
(120°C)
The engine runs erratically and misfires
The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
앫
An ignition cable may be damaged.
앫
The engine electronics may not be operating properly.
앫
Unburned gasoline may have entered
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
왘
Give very little gas.
왘
Have the problem repaired by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
50
왘
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible
and turn off the engine. Allow engine
and coolant to cool down.
왘
Check the coolant level and add coolant if necessary (컄 page 232).
i
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
a warning message in the multifunction
display (컄 page 269).
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
왘
Do not start the engine under any circumstances.
왘
Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be determined:
왘
Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫
major assemblies
앫
fuel system
앫
engine mount
왘
Start the engine in the usual manner.
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive.
You have properly stopped and parked
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Warning!
G
Wait until the vehicle is stationary before removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
the SmartKey is removed.
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Parking brake
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible.
앫
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove.
앫
Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle
when leaving.
1 Lever
2 Button
왘
Pull lever 1 up as many notches as
possible.
When the engine is running, the warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster
will be illuminated.
51
Getting started
Parking and locking
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selector lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Warning!
G
왘
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
position P alone may not prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
When parked on an incline, turn front wheels
towards the road curb.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to M
(컄 page 46).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 104).
Place the gear selector lever in
position P.
i
Always set the parking brake in addition to shifting to position P.
On slopes, turn the front wheels towards the road curb.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P.
Switching off headlamps
52
Turning off engine
왘
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
i
The SmartKey can only be pulled out
when:
앫
it has been turned to position 0 in
the starter switch
앫
the gear selector lever for the automatic transmission is in position P
앫
you are not depressing the brake
pedal
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘
Press the seat belt release button 3
(컄 page 41).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind the seat belt by guiding the latch
plate.
!
With the SmartKey removed and the
driver’s door open, a warning sounds if
the vehicles exterior lamps are not
switched off.
Warning!
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door
openings when closing the doors. Be especially careful when small children are
around.
Before closing doors, ensure there is no possibility of someone getting caught in a door
during closing.
왘
After exiting the vehicle, press the lock
button ‹ on the SmartKey
(컄 page 32).
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
your vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 86).
The locking knobs on the doors move
down.
53
54
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving and safety systems
Anti-theft systems
55
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왔 Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most important facts about the restraint systems
of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are
앫
Seat belts
앫
Emergency tensioning device
앫
Airbags
앫
Child seats
앫
Child seat recognition
앫
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH)
As independent systems, their protective
effects work in conjunction with each other.
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 65).
56
The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 25) comes on:
앫
for about four seconds when you turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1.
앫
for about four seconds when you start
the engine by turning the SmartKey.
i
The 1 indicator lamp remains lit if
the SmartKey is turned to position 2
and left there. The indicator lamp will
go out when you start the engine.
The 1 indicator lamp goes out shortly
after you start the engine. This shows that
the restraint systems are operational.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
A malfunction in the system has been detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫
fails to extinguish after approximately
four seconds.
앫
does not come on at all.
앫
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving.
For safety reasons, we strongly recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 258).
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on during driving or does not come
on at all, the SRS may not be operational.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
be activated when needed in an accident,
which could result in serious or fatal injury,
or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Improper work on the restraint systems, including incorrect installation and removal,
can lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
In addition, through improper work there is
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
causing unintended airbag deployment.
Work on the SRS must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Airbags
Warning!
G
Airbags are designed to reduce the potential
of injury in certain frontal (front airbags) impacts, which may cause significant injuries.
However, no system available today can totally eliminate injuries and fatalities.
The activation of the SRS temporarily releases a small amount of dust from the airbags.
This dust, however, is neither injurious to
your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some temporary breathing difficulty for people with asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this,
you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the airbag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
57
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
The service life of the passenger front airbag
extends to the date indicated on the label located on the driver side B pillar. To provide
continued reliability after that date, they
should be inspected by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center at that
time and replaced when necessary.
Warning!
G
Adjust the driver seat as far as possible
rearward, still permitting proper operation of vehicle controls. The distance
from the center of the driver’s breastbone to the center of the airbag cover on
the steering wheel must be at least
ten inches (25 cm) or more. You should
be able to accomplish this by a combination of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any problems, please see your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
Do not lean with your head or chest
close to the steering wheel or dashboard.
앫
Keep hands on the outside of steering
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside the rim can increase the risk and
potential severity of hand/arm injury
when driver front airbag inflates.
앫
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard
when the seat is occupied.
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
airbags inflate, it is very important for the
driver and front passenger to always be in a
properly seated position and to wear your
seat belt.
For maximum protection in the event of a
collision always be in normal seated position
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
your seat belt and ensure it is properly positioned on your body (컄 page 62).
Since the airbag inflates with considerable
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
on steering wheel position will help to keep
you at a safe distance from the airbag. Occupants who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously injured by an airbag as it inflates with great
force in the blink of an eye:
앫
58
앫
Sit properly belted in an upright position
with your back against the backrest.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
Always sit upright, properly use the seat
belts and appropriate size infant or child
restraint system.
Children 12 years old and under must
never ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmartTM1 compatible child seat,
which operates with the BabySmartTM
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it
is properly installed. Otherwise they will
be struck by the airbag when it inflates
in a crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury will result.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injuries to you or other occupants.
If you sell your vehicle you are responsible
to make the buyer aware of these points.
Make sure to give the buyer this Operator’s
Manual.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
Warning!
G
Accident research shows that the safest
place for children in an automobile is in the
rear seat. Should you choose to place a child
12 years old or under in the front passenger
seat of your vehicle, you must properly use
a BabySmartTM child restraint which will
turn off the passenger front airbag
(컄 page 68).
i
Airbags are designed to activate only in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts
which exceed preset thresholds.
Only during these types of impacts, if of
sufficient severity to meet the deployment thresholds, will they provide their
supplemental protection.
The driver and passenger should always wear their seat belts. Otherwise it
is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplemental protection.
In cases of other frontal impacts, angled impacts, roll-overs, other side impacts, rear collisions, or other
accidents, the airbags will not be activated. The driver and passengers will
then be protected by the fastened seat
belts.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the airbags in order to avoid
wearing your seat belt.
59
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Your vehicle was originally equipped
with airbags that are designed to activate in certain impacts exceeding a
preset threshold to reduce the potential and severity of injury. It is important
to your safety and that of your passenger that you replace deployed airbags
and repair any malfunctioning airbags
to make sure the vehicle will continue
to provide supplemental crash protection for occupants.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
emergency tensioning device and
airbag
Warning!
앫
앫
60
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were
highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced and their anchoring points
must also be checked. Use only belts installed or supplied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
No modifications of any kind may be
made to any components or wiring of
the SRS. This includes changing or removing any component or part of the
SRS, the installation of additional trim
material, badges, etc. over the steering
wheel hub, passenger front airbag cover, or door trim panels, and installation
of additional electrical/electronic
equipment on or near SRS components
and wiring. Keep area between airbags
and occupants free from objects (e.g.
packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.).
앫
Airbags and emergency tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed to function on
a one-time-only basis. An airbag or ETD
that was activated must be replaced.
앫
Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
They could tear.
앫
Do not make any modification that could
change the effectiveness of the belts.
앫
An airbag system component within the
steering wheel gets hot after the airbag
has inflated. Do not touch.
앫
Improper work on the system, including
incorrect installation and removal, can
lead to possible injury through an unintended activation of the SRS.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
앫
앫
앫
In addition, through improper work
there is a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or causing unintended airbag deployment. Work on the SRS must
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the airbag
unit or emergency tensioning device,
our safety instructions must be followed. These instructions are available
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Given the considerable deployment
speed and the textile structure of the
airbags, there is the possibility of abrasions or other injuries resulting from airbag deployment.
Warning!
G
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
comes on while driving, the SRS may not be
operational. For your safety, we strongly
recommend that you visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immediately to have the system checked; otherwise
the SRS may not be activated when needed
in an accident, which could result in serious
or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in injury.
Front airbags
1 Driver airbag
2 Passenger front airbag
Driver and passenger airbags are deployed:
앫
in the event of a frontal impact
앫
if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
When you sell your vehicle we strongly
urge you to give notice to the subsequent
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
61
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The airbags will not deploy in impacts
which do not exceed the system’s deployment thresholds. You will then be protected by the fastened seat belts.
The passenger front airbag will only be deployed if:
앫
the passenger seat is occupied
앫
the 7 indicator lamp in the center
console is not lit (컄 page 68)
앫
the impact exceeds a preset deployment threshold
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the passenger
front airbag to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
62
Seat belts
When the engine is started, the seat-belt
non-usage warning lamp < illuminates
to remind you and your passengers to fasten your seat belts. If the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened before the engine is started, the seat belt non-usage warning
lamp < illuminates and a warning
chime sounds for approximately six seconds when the engine is started.
The use of seat belts and infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in all
50 states, the District of Columbia and all
Canadian provinces. Even where this is not
the case, all vehicle occupants should have
their seat belts fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
For more information, see “Fastening the
seat belt” (컄 page 40).
i
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint systems for infants and children, see “Children in the vehicle”
(컄 page 65).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
accident. You and your passengers should
always wear seat belts.
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
or killed.
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. Airbags can only protect as
they are designed if the occupants are properly wearing their seat belts.
Warning!
G
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the backrest reclined. Sitting in an excessively reclined position can be dangerous. You could
slide under the seat belt in a collision. If you
slide under it, the belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in an upright position and the belt
is properly positioned on the body.
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly
stressed in an accident must be replaced
and their anchoring points must also be
checked.
Only use seat belts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
or to failure.
Have all work carried out only by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle
than there are seat belts available. Be sure
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly restrained with a separate seat belt.
63
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
앫
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
앫
앫
64
Seat belts can only work when used
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
other way than as described in this section, as that could result in serious injuries in case of an accident.
Each occupant should wear their seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help
reduce the likelihood of and potential
severity of injuries in accidents, including rollovers. The integrated restraint
system includes SRS (driver airbag and
passenger front airbag), ETD (seat belt
emergency tensioning device for driver’s seat, front passenger seat and the
outboard passenger seats). The system
is designed to enhance the protection
offered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front airbags) impacts
which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.
앫
Never wear the shoulder belt under your
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder. In a crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the
chance of head and neck injuries. The
belt would also apply too much force to
the ribs or abdomen, which could severely injure internal organs such as
your liver or spleen.
Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
objects in or on your clothing, such as
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as these
might cause injuries.
앫
Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips and not across the abdomen. If the belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
in a crash.
앫
Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
belt around a person and another person or other objects.
앫
Belts should not be worn twisted. In a
crash, you wouldn’t have the full width
of the belt to manage impact forces. The
twisted belt against your body could
cause injuries.
앫
Pregnant women should also use a
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible
on the hips to avoid any possible pressure on the abdomen.
앫
Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both
feet on the floor in front of the seat.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
seat belt force limiter
The seat belts for the front and rear outer
seats are equipped with emergency tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
The ETD is designed to activate only when
the seat belt is fastened and in the following cases:
앫
in frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding a preset severity level
앫
if the restraint systems are operational
and functioning correctly, see
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 56)
In an impact, emergency tensioning devices remove slack from the belts in such a
way that the seat belts fit more snugly
against the body.
Warning!
G
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced.
When disposing of the emergency tensioning device, our safety instructions must be
followed. These are available at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
!
Do not place objects heavier than
20 lbs (9 kg) on the front passenger
seat. This could cause the passenger
front airbag to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system's deployment
threshold.
Children in the vehicle
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
the vehicle:
앫
Secure the child using an infant or child
restraint appropriate to the age and
size of the child and recommended for
use by Mercedes-Benz.
앫
Make sure the infant or child is properly secured by a belt at all times while
the vehicle is in motion.
Infant and child restraint seats and information on choosing an appropriate restraint system can be obtained from any
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
65
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infant and child restraint systems
i
!
Use only a BabySmartTM1
For more information on child seats
with mounting fittings for tether anchorages, see “Installation of infant
and child restraint system”
(컄 page 69).
The use of infant or child restraints is
required by law in all 50 states, the
District of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces.
compatible child
restraint for the front passenger seat in
this vehicle.
We recommend that all infants and
children be properly restrained at all times
while the vehicle is in motion. All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s seat belt have
special seat belt retractors for secure fastening of child restraints.
To fasten a child restraint, follow manufacturer’s instructions for mounting child restraints. Then pull shoulder belt out
completely and let it retract. During the
seat belt retraction a ratcheting sound can
be heard to indicate that the special seat
belt retractor is activated. The belt is now
locked. Push down on child restraint to
take up any slack.
To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
let seat belt retract completely. The seat
belt can again be used in the usual manner.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
66
For information on LATCH-type child
seat anchors, see (컄 page 70).
Warning!
G
Never release the seat belt buckle while the
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
belt retractor will be deactivated.
Infants and small children should be
seated in an appropriate infant or child
restraint system properly secured by a
lap-shoulder belt or, if so equipped, a
child restraint lower anchorage system
that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 210.2.
A statement by the child restraint manufacturer of compliance with this standard can be found on the instruction
label on the restraint and in the instruction manual provided with the restraint.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When using any infant or child restraint
system, be sure to carefully read and
follow all manufacturer’s instructions
for installation and use.
Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to inside of vehicle and to infant
or child restraints.
Warning!
G
Children 12 years old and under must never
ride in the front seat, except in a
Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmartTM
compatible child seat, which operates with
the BabySmartTM System installed in the vehicle to deactivate the passenger front airbag when it is properly installed. Otherwise
they will be struck by the airbag when it inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious or
fatal injury can result.
Infants and small children should never
share a seat belt with another occupant.
During an accident, they could be crushed
between the occupant and seat belt.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. Infants and small children
must ride in back seats and be seated in an
appropriate infant or child restraint system,
which is properly secured with the vehicle’s
seat belt and top tether strap, or secured via
lower anchors and top tether strap, fully in
accordance with the child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the
seat belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. Unsupervised children in a child restraint system may use vehicle equipment and may cause serious
personal injury.
i
The system does not deactivate the
emergency tensioning device.
Self-test BabySmartTM without special
child seat installed
7 indicator lamp
Special BabySmartTM1 compatible child
seats, designed for use with the
Mercedes-Benz system and available at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center are required for use with the
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system.
With the special child seat properly installed, the passenger front airbag will not
deploy.
1
68
The 7 indicator lamp located in the
center console will be illuminated, except
with the SmartKey removed or in the starter switch position 0.
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
After turning the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 1 or 2, the
7 indicator lamp located in the center
console comes on for approximately
six seconds and then goes out.
If the indicator lamp should not come on or
is continuously lit, the system is not functioning. You must see an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center before
seating any child on the front passenger
seat.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 259).
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
The BabySmartTM airbag deactivation system will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work
with child seats which are not BabySmartTM
compatible.
Never place anything between seat cushion
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
the effectiveness of the deactivation system. The bottom of the child seat must
make full contact with the passenger seat
cushion. An incorrectly mounted child seat
could cause injuries to the child in case of an
accident, instead of protecting the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of special child seats.
When using a BabySmartTM compatible
child seat on the front passenger seat, the
passenger front airbag will not deploy only if
the 7 indicator lamp remains illuminated.
Warning!
G
Installation of infant and child restraint
system
Make sure to check the indicator every time
you use the special system child seat.
Should the light go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation. If the
light remains out, do not use the
BabySmartTM restraint to transport children
on the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
Warning!
G
Do not place powered-on laptops, cell
phones and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such devices may interfere with the BabySmartTM
system. Such signal interference may cause
the 7 indicator lamp not to come on during self-test or be continuously lit, indicating
that the system is not functioning.
1 Anchorage ring for rear left side seat
2 Anchorage ring for rear right side seat
3 Anchorage ring for rear center seat
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘
Guide top tether strap between head
restraint and top of seat back. Head
restraint must be installed and positioned such that the top tether strap
can pass freely between the head restraint and top of seat back.
When mounting a tether strap on the
rear outer seats, reinstall the cargo
compartment cover blind (컄 page 176)
and optional partition net
(컄 page 178).
i
Child seat anchors – LATCH type
For safety, make sure the hook is attached to the ring beyond the safety
catch, as illustrated.
This vehicle is provided with two LATCH
(LOWER Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) type anchors (at each of the outer
rear seats) for installation of a LATCH child
seat with matching mounting fittings.
Warning!
G
Use only the described anchorage rings for
the respective child seat. Other lashing eyelets could tear in the case of an accident.
Make sure
앫
the fastening straps are not crossed or
twisted.
앫
the hook is properly attached and is
closed.
Anchors
Install a LATCH type child seat according
to the manufacturer’s instructions.
왘
4 Hook
왘
Securely fasten hook 4 to anchorage
ring.
70
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i
With a child seat installed in the left
rear seat, the seat belt for the center
seat occupied by a passenger must operate freely.
Non-LATCH type child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child
seat according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
Warning!
G
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached in the
right and left side anchors.
Warning!
G
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident.
Blocking rear door window operation
The override switch is located in the driver’s door.
Damaged or impact-damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
Children too big for child restraint systems
must ride in back seats using regular seat
belts. Position shoulder belt across chest
and shoulder, not face or neck. A booster
seat may be necessary to achieve proper
belt positioning for children from 41 lbs until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
belt fits properly without a booster.
1 Override switch
Activating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 1 to the right.
A dot becomes visible. The functions in
the rear are disabled.
i
Operation of the rear windows with the
switches located in the driver’s door is
still possible.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning!
G
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
The children may otherwise injure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the window opening.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment can cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Deactivating override switch
왘
Slide override switch 1 to the left.
The functions in the rear are enabled
again.
For more information on power windows,
see “Power windows” (컄 page 164).
72
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
An audible alarm and blinking turn signal
lamps will operate for approximately
2½ minutes.
1 Â button
왘
To activate: Press and hold button 1
for at least one second.
왘
To deactivate: Press button 1 again or
insert SmartKey in starter switch.
i
For operation in the USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
앫
This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
앫
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
73
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
왔 Driving and safety systems
In this section you will find information on
the following driving safety systems:
Warning!
G
ABS
앫
ABS (Antilock Brake System)
BAS (Brake Assist System)
The following factors increase the risk of accidents:
Warning!
앫
앫
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System)
앫
Excessive speed, especially in turns
앫
EBB (Electronic Brake Booster)
앫
Wet and slippery road surfaces
앫
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
앫
Following another vehicle too closely
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
ABS and significantly reduces braking effectiveness.
i
In winter operation, the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP, EBB and
4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires
(M+S tires), or snow chains as required.
The ABS, BAS, ESP and 4-ETS cannot reduce
this risk.
Always adjust your driving style to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
G
The ABS regulates the brake pressure so
that the wheels do not lock during braking.
This allows you to maintain the ability to
steer your vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions (as long as the
differential locks are not engaged).
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode. Keep firm and steady
pressure on the brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
74
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Continuous steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will respond even with light brake pressure. The
pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions and functions as a reminder to take extra care while
driving.
The - indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when you
turn the SmartKey to position 2. It goes
out when the engine is running.
Braking
LOW RANGE– ABS
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
the regulating mode.
During off-road driving a special low range
system for the antilock brake system (ABS)
is operational with transfer case in position
LOW (컄 page 145).
왘
An improved braking action (dig-in effect)
is obtained for vehicle speeds up to
37 mph (60 km/h) through a change in the
ABS control function.
Keep firm and steady pressure on the
brake pedal while experiencing the pulsation.
Emergency brake maneuver
왘
Keep continuous full pressure on the
brake pedal.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 252).
i
If the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS,
EBB, ESP and 4-ETS are also switched
off.
Normal driving and braking functions
are still available.
75
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Warning!
G
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded. The ABS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
BAS
Warning!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
emergency situations. If you apply the
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
provides full brake boost, thereby potentially reducing braking distance. Apply continuous full braking pressure until the
emergency braking situation is over. The
ABS will prevent the wheels from locking.
When you release the brake pedal the
brakes function again as normal. The BAS
is then deactivated.
With the BAS malfunctioning, the ABS, ESP
and 4-ETS are also switched off.
G
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes
and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 261).
76
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
4-ETS
Warning!
The 4-ETS improves vehicle’s ability to utilize available traction, especially under
slippery road conditions. The brakes are
applied to the spinning wheel and power is
allowed to flow to the wheel(s) with traction.
The 4-ETS function is available between vehicle speeds of 0 mph (km/h) and 37 mph
(60 km/h).
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) comes on when
you turn the SmartKey to position 2. It
goes out when the engine is running.
The ESP warning lamp v starts to flash
at any vehicle speed, as soon as the tires
lose traction and the wheels begin to spin.
G
When you see the ESP warning lamp v
flashing in the instrument cluster, then proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
!
The engine must be shut off when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer.
앫
the vehicle is being towed with one
axle raised.
Otherwise, the 4-ETS will engage the
brakes and seriously damage the brake
system.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 257).
The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resulting from excessive speed.
77
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
EBB
ESP
The EBB enhances braking effectiveness
by allowing the rear brakes to supply a
greater proportion of the braking effort in
straight line braking circumstances without a loss of vehicle stability.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of adhesive friction between the tires and the
road surface) and handling.
Warning!
The ESP recognizes when a wheel is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By applying brakes to the appropriate wheel and
by limiting engine output, the ESP works to
stabilize the vehicle.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster (컄 page 24) flashes when the
ESP is engaged.
The ESP warning lamp v comes on
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2.
It goes out when the engine is running.
78
G
Never switch off the ESP when you see the
ESP warning lamp v flashing in the instrument cluster. In this case proceed as follows:
앫
While driving off, apply as little throttle
as possible.
앫
While driving ease up on the accelerator.
앫
Adapt your speed and driving style to
the prevailing road conditions.
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause the vehicle to skid.
The ESP cannot prevent accidents resulting
from excessive speed.
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Warning!
G
The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP
cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too closely, or aquaplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of a ESP equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
!
Driving the vehicle with varied size tires
will cause the wheels to rotate at different speeds, possibly causing the ESP to
activate. For this reason, all wheels, including the spare wheel, must have the
same tire outside diameter.
!
Switching off the ESP
The engine must be shut off when
앫
the parking brake is being tested on
a brake test dynamometer.
앫
the vehicle is being towed with one
axle raised.
Warning!
The ESP should not be switched off during
normal driving other than in the circumstances described below. Disabling of the
system will reduce vehicle stability in standard driving maneuvers.
Otherwise, the ESP will engage the
brakes and seriously damage the brake
system.
i
The ABS, BAS and ESP are automatically switched off when the differential
locks are switched on (컄 page 150).
G
To improve the vehicle’s traction, turn off
the ESP in driving situations where it would
be advantageous to have the drive wheels
spin and thus cut into surfaces for better
grip such as:
앫
starting out on slippery surfaces and in
deep snow in conjunction with snow
chains.
앫
sand or gravel.
앫
when driving off-road.
When the ESP is turned off
앫
engine torque is not limited.
앫
the drive wheels can spin.
79
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
!
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
extended period of time with the ESP
switched off. This may cause serious
damage to the drivetrain which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
The ESP control switch is located in the upper center console.
ESP on/off
왘
Press upper half of switch.
ESP is deactivated and the ESP warning
lamp v in the instrument cluster
comes on.
80
앫
when braking
앫
at vehicle speeds up to approximately
37 mph (60 km/h), if one wheel reaches the grip limit, e.g. when the street is
icy on one side
The brake is applied until the wheel regains sufficient traction.
i
Turn ESP on immediately if the aforementioned circumstances do not apply
anymore.
Even if the ESP has been turned off, it is
still active in the following situations:
If one or more drive wheels are spinning,
the ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster flashes, regardless of the
speed.
i
If the ESP is switched off, it will be automatically activated when exceeding a
vehicle speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) or
exceeding a severity threshold of side
acceleration.
Safety and Security
Driving and safety systems
Warning!
G
When the ESP warning lamp v is
illuminated continuously, the ESP is
switched off.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP.
Switching on the ESP
왘
Press lower half of switch.
The ESP warning lamp v in the instrument cluster goes out. You are now
again in normal driving mode.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 257).
81
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
Anti-theft alarm
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone:
Activating
Removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch activates the immobilizer.
Deactivating
Inserting the SmartKey in the starter
switch deactivates the immobilizer.
i
In case the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle’s battery is charged),
the system is not operational. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
82
앫
opens a door
앫
opens the tailgate
앫
opens the hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element (a door, for example) is immediately closed.
The alarm system will also be triggered
when
앫
someone attempts to raise the vehicle
앫
the vehicle is opened with the mechanical key
i
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system (컄 page 190) provided Tele Aid
service was subscribed to and properly
activated, and that necessary cellular
service and GPS coverage are available.
Arming the alarm system
The alarm system is armed after locking
the vehicle with the SmartKey. The turn
signal lamps blink three times to indicate
that the alarm system is activated. A red
lamp in the tow-away alarm switch begins
to blink after arming the alarm system
(컄 page 27).
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i
Canceling the alarm
If the turn signal lamps do not blink
three times, one of the following elements may not be properly closed:
To cancel the alarm:
앫
a door
앫
the tailgate
앫
the hood
Close the respective element and lock
the vehicle again.
Disarming the alarm system
The alarm system is disarmed when you
unlock your vehicle with the SmartKey. The
turn signal lamps blink once to indicate
that the alarm system is deactivated.
왘
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
or
왘
Tow-away alarm
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
and audible alarm will be triggered when
someone attempts to raise the vehicle.
i
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
The tow-away protection alarm is triggered, for example, if the vehicle is lifted on one side.
If the alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds, an emergency call is initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated,
and that necessary cellular service and
GPS coverage are available.
83
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Arming tow-away alarm
When you lock your vehicle, the tow-away
alarm is automatically armed.
The switch is located on the center console.
왘
Press upper half 1 of the switch.
Indicator lamp 2 in the switch comes
on briefly.
왘
When you unlock your vehicle, the
tow-away protection disarms
automatically.
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed until you lock your vehicle again.
Disarming tow-away alarm
Canceling the tow-away alarm
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm
feature, switch off the tow-away alarm before towing the vehicle, or when parking on
a surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
To cancel the alarm:
왘
1 Tow-away alarm off switch
2 Indicator lamp
왘
Turn off the ignition and remove the
SmartKey.
i
You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
while the ignition is turned on.
84
Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey.
Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
or
왘
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Transfer case
Differential locks
Good visibility
Climate control
Power windows
Sliding/pop-up roof
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
85
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왔 Locking and unlocking
In the “Controls in detail” section you will
find detailed information on how to operate the equipment installed in your vehicle.
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will
be of particular interest to you.
To quickly familiarize yourself with the basic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are given at the beginning of each segment.
SmartKey
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
a removable mechanical key. The locking
tabs for the mechanical key portion of the
two SmartKeys are a different color to help
distinguish each key unit.
The SmartKey provides an extended operating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫
the doors
앫
the tailgate
앫
the fuel filler flap
SmartKey with remote controls
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Locking tab for mechanical key
3 ΠUnlock button
4 Battery check lamp
5 Â Panic button (컄 page 73)
i
You can also open and close the power
windows (컄 page 165) and sliding/pop-up roof (컄 page 167) using
the SmartKey.
86
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
Selective setting
Restoring to factory setting
To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of
electromagnetic radiation.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
pressing Œ only unlocks the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
왘
Factory setting
Press button Œ.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about five seconds
until battery check lamp 4 blinks
twice.
All turn signal lamps blink once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
왘
Global unlocking
왘
The vehicle will lock again automatically
within approximately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither door nor tailgate is
opened, the SmartKey is not inserted in
the starter switch, or the central locking
switch is not activated.
Global locking
왘
Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap
왘
Press button Πonce.
Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
simultaneously for about six seconds
until the battery check lamp 4 blinks
twice.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible for children to
open a locked door from the inside, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Global unlocking
왘
Press button Πtwice.
Press button ‹.
Global locking
All turn signal lamps blink three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down.
왘
Press button ‹.
87
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
!
Checking the batteries
If you can no longer lock or unlock the
vehicle with the SmartKey, then the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
왘
앫
Check the batteries in the SmartKey (컄 page 88) and replace them if
necessary (컄 page 288).
앫
Use the mechanical key to unlock
the doors (컄 page 287).
앫
Have the vehicle battery and the
battery connections checked by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center (컄 page 311).
앫
Use the mechanical key to lock the
doors and the tailgate
(컄 page 288).
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
88
Press button ‹ or Œ.
Battery check lamp 4 comes on briefly to indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in order.
!
If battery check lamp 4 does not
come on briefly during check, then the
SmartKey batteries are discharged.
Replace the batteries (컄 page 288).
You can obtain the required batteries
at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
i
If the batteries are checked within signal range of the vehicle, pressing the
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock
the vehicle accordingly.
Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
왘
Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
왘
Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
mechanical key immediately to your
car insurance company.
왘
If necessary have the mechanical lock
replaced.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center will be glad to supply you
with a replacement.
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the doors from the inside
i
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
If the vehicle has previously been
locked from the outside with the
SmartKey, opening a door from the inside will trigger the alarm.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
To cancel the alarm do one the following:
앫
Press the Œ or ‹ button on
the SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
Opening the tailgate
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
Pull on door handle 2.
If the door was locked, locking knob 1
moves up.
Warning!
G
The tailgate swings open to one side. Always
make sure there is sufficient clearance for
the tailgate.
1 Handle
2 Lock cylinder
왘
Press lock cylinder 2 and pull on tailgate handle 1.
왘
Open the tailgate to the side.
i
The vehicle must be unlocked.
Only drive with the tailgate closed as otherwise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
89
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Opening the tailgate from inside
Closing the tailgate
Warning!
Separately locking the tailgate
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the tailgate opening when closing the tailgate. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
1 Locking knob
2 Inside door handle
왘
Warning!
Pull on door handle 2.
If door was locked, the locking knob 1
moves up.
Warning!
G
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
90
i
To deny any unauthorized person access to the tailgate, lock it separately
with the mechanical key. Leave only
the SmartKey less its mechanical key
with the vehicle.
G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as otherwise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
i
To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do
not place the SmartKey in the cargo
compartment.
1 Neutral position
2 Locked
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
왘
Close the tailgate (컄 page 90).
Separately unlocking the tailgate
Automatic central locking
왘
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 287).
왘
Pull the mechanical key out of the
SmartKey (컄 page 287).
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the lock
cylinder.
왘
Insert the mechanical key in the lock
cylinder.
The doors and the tailgate automatically
lock when the ignition is switched on and
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
왘
Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2.
왘
Turn the mechanical key to neutral
position 1 (컄 page 90).
The tailgate remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
You can now open the tailgate
(컄 page 89).
i
You can only cancel the separate tailgate locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
You can open a locked door from the inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Warning!
G
Only drive with the tailgate closed as otherwise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
91
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
i
Locking and unlocking from the inside
The doors and the tailgate unlock automatically after an accident if the force
of the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle automatically locks when
the ignition is switched on and the
wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more. You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle
앫
is pushed
앫
is on a test stand
You can deactivate the automatic locking
using the control system (컄 page 133).
For information on towing the vehicle, see
“Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 315).
92
The central locking switch is located in the
center console.
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from inside using the central locking switches.
This can be useful, for example, if you want
to unlock the passenger door from the inside or want to lock the vehicle before
starting to drive.
The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or unlocked with the central locking switch.
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle
equipment may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Central locking switch
1 Locking
2 Unlocking
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Locking
왘
Press central locking switch 1.
If all the doors and the tailgate are
closed, the vehicle locks.
Unlocking
왘
Press central locking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.
i
You can open a locked door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions
are safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally
locked using the SmartKey, it will not
unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked
with the central locking switch
앫
while in the selective remote control mode, only the door opened
from the inside is unlocked.
앫
while in the global remote control
mode, the complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is opened from
the inside.
93
Controls in detail
Seats
왔 Seats
For more information on seat adjustment,
see the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 34).
Easy-entry/exit feature
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated
the steering wheel tilts upwards.
This allows easier entry into and exit from
the vehicle when the driver’s door is
opened. However, the engine must be
turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch and the driver’s door is closed,
the steering wheel returns to the last set
position.
94
Warning!
G
You must ensure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated, the driver’s door is being opened
and the engine is turned off.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be
switched on or off in the individual setting
menu CONVENIENCE - EASY-ENTRY FEATURE
ACTIVATE (컄 page 133).
i
To cancel steering wheel movement,
do one the following:
앫
Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 22)
앫
Press the memory button
(컄 page 102)
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing and installing front seat
head restraints
For more information on head restraint adjustment, see the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 36).
Warning!
i
Installing front seat head restraint
Tilt the seat backrest rearward for easier removal and installation of the head
restraints.
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold for
about five seconds.
왘
Press the head restraint down until it
engages.
왘
Adjust head restraint to the desired position.
Front seat head restraints
G
Synchronizing head restraints and seat
adjustment fore and aft for front seats
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
1 Switch
Removing front seat head restraint
If the power supply was interrupted (battery disconnected or discharged), the head
restraints and the seat adjustment fore
and aft are no longer adjusted automatically.
The head restraints and the seat adjustment fore and aft must be resynchronized:
왘
Press switch 1 upwards and hold until
the head restraint is fully extended.
왘
Turn SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2.
왘
Pull head restraint out.
왘
Move the seat completely forward
(컄 page 35) and the head restraint fully
down (컄 page 36) and hold the switches for approximately one second.
95
Controls in detail
Seats
Rear seat head restraints
Warning!
Head restraint height
G
Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Removing and installing rear seat head
restraints
G
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Manually adjust the height of the head restraint.
왘
Push or pull on the head restraint.
Adjust head restraint so that the head restraint supports the back of the head at eye
level. This will reduce the potential for injury
to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Do not interchange head restraints from
front and rear seat.
96
Controls in detail
Seats
Removing rear seat head restraints
Multicontour seat*
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
cushion and inflatable air cushions built
into the seat backrest to provide additional
lumbar and side support.
왘
Pull out head restraint with both hands.
i
The head restraint(s) should be stored
in a secure place.
The seat cushion movement and amount of
seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with regulators on the right side of the seat after
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2.
1 Seat cushion length
2 Backrest bottom
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest side bolsters
왘
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Installing rear seat head restraints
왘
Insert the head restraint and push it
down to the stop.
Ensure proper head restraint positioning
(컄 page 36).
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Seat cushion length
왘
Adjust the seat cushion to the length of
your upper leg using switch 1.
97
Controls in detail
Seats
Backrest contour
왘
Adjust the contour of the backrest to
the desired position using switches 2
and 3.
Heated seats
왘
Driver’s and front passenger seats
Press upper switch position 1.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
comes on.
The switch is located in the center console.
Backrest side bolsters
왘
Switching on seat heating
Switching off seat heating
Adjust the backrest side bolsters so
that they provide good lateral support
using switch 4.
왘
Press upper switch position 1 again.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Switching on rapid seat heating
왘
Press lower switch position 2.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
come on.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp remains lit.
98
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off rapid seat heating
왘
Press lower switch position 2 again.
i
Rear seats
Switching on seat heating
The switch is located on the B (center) pillar.
왘
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are blinking, there is insufficient voltage available as too many
electrical consumers are turned on.
The seat heater switches off automatically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
Press upper switch position 1.
A red indicator lamp on the switch
comes on.
Switching off seat heating
왘
Press upper switch position 1 again.
i
The seat heater will be automatically
switched off after approximately
30 minutes.
1 Normal heating
2 Rapid heating
Switching on rapid seat heating
왘
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on.
All the lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
Press lower switch position 2.
Both red indicator lamps on the switch
come on.
i
The system switches over to normal
heating mode after approximately five
minutes. Only one indicator lamp remains lit.
99
Controls in detail
Seats
Switching off rapid seat heating
왘
Press lower switch position 2 again.
i
If one or both of the lamps on the seat
heater switch are blinking, there is insufficient voltage available as too many
electrical consumers are turned on.
The seat heater switches off automatically.
The seat heater will switch back on
again automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is available.
100
Controls in detail
Memory function
왔 Memory function
!
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver should check and adjust the seat
height, seat position fore and aft, and
seat backrest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate control, reach and comfort. The head restraint should also be
adjusted for proper height. See also the
section on airbags (컄 page 57) for
proper seat positioning.
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation and comfort. Both the interior and
exterior rear view mirrors should be adjusted for adequate rear vision.
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
children should be seated in a properly
secured restraint system that complies
with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213
and 210.2.
The memory button and stored position
switch are located on the door.
You can store up to three different settings
per SmartKey.
The following settings are saved for each
stored position:
앫
Driver’s seat and seat backrest position
앫
Steering wheel position
앫
Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
position
앫
Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror position
앫
Front passenger seat position
Warning!
G
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function
while driving could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
These key-dependent memory settings
can be deactivated if desired
(컄 page 135).
101
Controls in detail
Memory function
1 Memory button
2 Stored position buttons
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on
or the relevant door is open and the
SmartKey is inserted in the starter
switch.
Storing positions into memory
Recalling positions from memory
왘
Adjust the seats, steering wheel and
exterior rear view mirrors to the desired position (컄 page 34).
왘
왘
Press memory button 1.
왘
Release memory button and push position button 2 within three seconds.
All the settings are stored at the selected position.
Press and hold position button 2 until
the seat, steering wheel and rear view
mirrors have fully moved to the stored
positions.
i
Releasing the button immediately
stops movement to the stored positions.
Warning!
G
Do not operate the power seats using the
memory button if the seat backrest is in an
excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move seat backrest to an upright position.
102
Controls in detail
Memory function
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position
For easier parking, you can adjust the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so
that you can see the right rear wheel as
soon as you engage reverse gear R.
For information on activating the parking
position, see “Activating exterior rear view
mirror parking position” (컄 page 153).
i
You can store a parking position for the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror for each SmartKey using the memory switch.
1 Adjustment button
2 Driver’s side mirror
3 Passenger-side mirror
4 Memory button
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Switch ignition on (if not already on).
왘
Press button 3.
왘
Adjust the exterior rear view mirror
with button 1 so that you see the rear
wheel and the curb.
왘
Press memory button 4 on the door.
왘
Within three seconds, press bottom of
adjustment button 1 above the exterior lamp switch.
The parking position is stored if the
mirror does not move.
i
If the mirror does move, repeat the
above steps. After the setting is stored
you can move the mirror again.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror is selected.
103
Controls in detail
Lighting
왔 Lighting
For notes on how to switch on the headlamps and use the turn signals, see the
“Getting started” section (컄 page 46).
i
If you drive in countries where vehicles
drive on the other side of the road than
the country where the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps
modified for symmetrical low beams.
Relevant information can be obtained
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Exterior lamp switch
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
M Off
U Automatic headlamp mode
C Parking lamps (also side marker
lamps, tail lamps, license plate
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
Canada only: When engine is running, the low beam is additionally
switched on.
B Parking lamps plus low beam or
high beam headlamps (combination
switch pushed forward).
ˆ Standing lamps, right (turn left one
stop)
‚ Standing lamps, left (turn left two
stops)
104
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
Manual headlamp mode
If you remove the SmartKey and open
the driver’s door while the parking
lamps or low beam headlamps are
switched on:
The low beam headlamps and parking
lamps can be switched on and off with the
exterior lamp switch, see (컄 page 104).
앫
a warning sounds
Automatic headlamp mode
앫
$ appears in the multifunction
display
앫
the message TURN OFF LIGHTS! appears in the multifunction display
The parking lamps, low beam headlamps
and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness
of the ambient light.
i
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the engine running, the
low beam headlamps cannot be
switched off manually.
왘
Turn the exterior lamp switch to U.
Warning!
G
If the exterior lamp switch is set to U,
앫
the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic.
앫
the headlamps will not be automatically
switched on under foggy conditions.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp
switch to B when driving or when traffic
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only
switch from position U to B with the
vehicle at a standstill. Switching from U
to B will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient
lighting conditions may result in an accident.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
times.
105
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
Daytime running lamp mode
With the daytime running lamp mode
activated, the low beam headlamps will
not be switched off automatically.
왘
i
Front fog lamps and rear fog lamp can
not be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position U. To
activate the fog lamps, turn exterior
lamp switch to position B.
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position M or U.
When the engine is running, the low beam
headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions the parking
lamps will also switch on.
Canada only
When you shift from a driving position to
position N or P, the low beam switches off
(three minutes delay).
For nighttime driving, you should turn the
exterior lamp switch to position B to
permit activation of the high beam headlamps.
USA only
The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior
lamp switch in position M.
106
To activate the daytime running lamp
mode, see “Setting daytime running lamp
mode” (컄 page 129).
i
See notes on the exterior lamp switch
(컄 page 104).
Locator lighting and night security illumination
Locator lighting and night security illumination are described in the control system
section under “Setting locator lighting”
(컄 page 130) and “Setting night security illumination” (컄 page 131).
Exterior rear view mirror lamps
If the vehicle is centrally unlocked in the
darkness, the lamps in the exterior rear
view mirrors come on.
Controls in detail
Lighting
i
If a door is opened, the lamp on this side
goes out. If no doors are opened, the
lamps go out:
앫
when the ignition is switched on
앫
after a maximum of 40 seconds
Fog lamps will operate with the parking
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps
on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps.
Consult your State or Province Motor
Vehicle Regulations regarding allowable lamp operation.
Switching on front fog lamps
Warning!
G
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B
with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching
from U to B will briefly switch off
the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
accident.
왘
Make sure the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first
stop.
Combination switch
The combination switch is located on the
left side of the steering column.
Switching on rear fog lamp
왘
Check that the low beam headlamps
are switched on.
왘
Pull out exterior lamp switch to second
stop.
The yellow indicator lamp † in the
lamp switch comes on.
1 High beam
2 High beam flasher
The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamp switch comes on.
107
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on high beams
왘
왘
Turn exterior lamp switch to
position B or to U
(컄 page 104).
Push the combination switch in
direction 1.
The high beam headlamp
indicator A in the instrument cluster comes on.
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the ignition switched on or off. It is
activated automatically when an airbag is
deployed.
Switching on the hazard warning
flasher
왘
All the turn signals will blink.
i
The switch is located on the center console.
With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set
for either left or right turn, only the respective left or right turn signals will
operate when the SmartKey in the
starter switch is in position 1 or 2.
High beam flasher
왘
Press the hazard warning flasher
switch.
Pull the combination switch briefly in
direction 2.
Switching off the hazard warning
flasher
왘
1 Hazard warning flasher switch
108
Press hazard warning flasher switch
again.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Interior lighting
Activating automatic control
왘
Move rocker switch 3 to center
position.
Deactivating automatic control
왘
Interior lamps are switched on in darkness, when you
1 Cargo compartment lamps
2 Right reading lamp
3 Rocker switch for automatic control
system
4 Left reading lamp
i
If the door remains open, the interior
lamps switch off automatically after approximately five minutes.
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
In addition, the entry lamps in the door
trays will come on when you open a
door.
The interior lamps are switched off following an adjustable time delay
(컄 page 132).
Press the = symbol on rocker
switch 3.
The interior lighting and the entry
lamps remain switched off in darkness,
even when you
앫
unlock the vehicle
앫
open a door
앫
remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Manual control
Switching lamps on
왘
Press the W symbol on rocker
switch 3.
The interior lighting remains on even
when the doors are closed.
109
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching lamps off
왘
Move rocker switch 3 to center position to activate the automatic control.
!
Rear interior lamps
Cargo compartment lamps
The rear interior lamps are located above
the rear seat bench on the left and right
side.
Switching on and off
To prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged, all interior lamps
switch off automatically after approximately 30 minutes with the tailgate
open.
If an interior lamp is switched on manually, it does not go out automatically.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure
the interior lamps are switched off.
The rear interior lamps can be switched
on with the SmartKey in starter switch
position 0 or SmartKey removed from
the starter switch for up to 30 minutes.
110
1 Switch for cargo compartment lamps
1 The lamps are switched on
continuously
2 The lamps are switched off
3 Automatic function
왘
Press button ò to switch the cargo
compartment lamps 2 on/off.
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching on
왘
Press lock cylinder 2 to activate the
cargo compartment lamps again.
The cargo compartment lamps will
switch on.
Warning!
2 Cargo compartment lamps
Switching on and off with the tailgate
open
If the tailgate should remain open for a
longer period of time, the cargo compartment lamps may be switched off separately.
1 Door lock
2 Lock cylinder
Switching off
왘
Open the tailgate.
왘
Press door lock 1 down until it engages (arrow).
G
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the tailgate opening when closing the tailgate. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
Only drive with the tailgate closed as otherwise exhaust fumes may enter the vehicle
interior.
!
Do not close the tailgate if the lock is
engaged in down position. The lock
could otherwise be damaged.
When locking the tailgate, it is important that the door lock be in the same
position as shown in the illustration.
111
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
A full view illustration of the instrument
cluster can be found in the “At a glance”
section of this manual (컄 page 24).
Instrument cluster illumination
Use the reset button to adjust the illumination brightness for the instrument cluster.
To dim illumination
왘
The instrument cluster illumination will
dim.
i
The instrument cluster illumination is
dimmed or brightened automatically to
suit ambient light conditions.
The instrument cluster illumination will
also be adjusted automatically when
you switch on the vehicle’s exterior
lamps.
1 Reset button
The instrument cluster is activated when
you:
앫
open a door
앫
turn on the ignition
앫
press reset button 1
앫
switch on the exterior lamps
You can change the instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu of
the control system (컄 page 127).
112
Coolant temperature display
Warning!
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
cluster clockwise.
The instrument cluster illumination will
brighten.
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
To brighten illumination
왘
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
cluster counterclockwise.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
왘
Call up the trip odometer and main
odometer by pressing button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel (컄 page 116).
왘
Press button j or k until the
coolant temperature display appears.
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Trip odometer
왘
Make sure you are viewing the trip
odometer display (컄 page 115).
왘
If it is not displayed, press button è
or ÿ on the multifunction steering
wheel (컄 page 116) until the trip odometer appears.
왘
Press and hold the reset button on the
instrument cluster (컄 page 112) until
the trip odometer is reset.
i
Excessive coolant temperature triggers
a warning in the multifunction display
(컄 page 269).
Tachometer
The red marking on the tachometer denotes excessive engine speed.
!
Avoid driving at excessive engine
speeds, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated
within the red marking.
113
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Outside temperature indicator
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
The outside temperature is displayed in
the multifunction display (컄 page 115).
For information on how to select the unit of
the displayed temperature, i.e. degrees
Celsius (°C) or degrees Fahrenheit (°F),
see “Selecting temperature display mode”
(컄 page 127).
114
The temperature sensor is located in the
front bumper area. Due to its location, the
sensor can be affected by road or engine
heat during idling or slow driving. This
means that the accuracy of the displayed
temperature can only be verified by comparison to a thermometer placed next to
the sensor, not by comparison to external
displays (e.g. bank signs, etc.).
When moving the vehicle into colder ambient temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
garage), you will notice a delay before the
lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temperatures rise. This prevents inaccurate temperature indications caused by heat
radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as
the SmartKey in the starter switch is
turned to position 1. The control system
enables you to
앫
call up information about your vehicle
앫
change vehicle settings
For example, you can use the control system to find out when your vehicle is next
due for service, to set the language for
messages in the instrument cluster display
and much more.
Warning!
G
Multifunction display
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
For your safety and the safety of others, selecting features through the multifunction
steering wheel should only be done by the
driver when traffic and road conditions permit it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1 Trip odometer
2 Main odometer
3 Outside temperature
4 Clock1
5 Current gear selector lever position
6 Transfer case program mode
The control system relays information to
the multifunction display.
1
See separate operating instructions for the
COMAND system for clock setting.
115
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are
controlled by the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
1 Multifunction display in the speedometer
Operating the control system
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume
ç down/to decrease
æ up/to increase
3 Telephone*
í to take a call
ì to end a call
4 Menu systems
è for next menu
ÿ for previous menu
5 Moving within a menu
j for next display
k for previous display
116
Pressing any of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel will alter what is
shown in the multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or submenus.
The individual functions are then found
within the relevant menu (radio or CD operations under AUDIO, for example). These
functions serve to call up relevant information or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
functions within each menu, as being arranged in a circular pattern.
앫
앫
If you press button è or ÿ
repeatedly, you will pass through each
menu one after the other.
If you press button k or j
repeatedly, you will pass through each
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
In the SETTINGS menu, instead of functions
you will find a number of submenus for
calling up and changing settings. For instructions on using these submenus, see
the “Settings menu” section (컄 page 123).
The menus are described on the following
pages.
The number of menus available in the system depends on which optional equipment
is installed in your vehicle.
117
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus
118
This is what you will see when you scroll
through the menus.
The table on the next page provides an
overview of the individual menus.
Controls in detail
Control system
Commands/submenu
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1
Menu 2
Menu 3
Menu 4
Menu 5
Menu 6
Menu 7
Standard
display
AUDIO
NAVI
Malfunction
memory
Settings
Trip computer
Telephone
Coolant
temperature
display
Select radio
station
Activate route
guidance
Call up
malfunction
messages
Reset to factory Fuel
settings
consumption
statistics after
start
Load phone book
Digital
speedometer
Operate CD
player
Instrument
Fuel
cluster submenu consumption
statistics since
the last reset
Search for name
in phone book
Call up FSS
Lighting
submenu
Check engine oil
level
Vehicle submenu
Call up range
Convenience
submenu
119
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Standard display menu
AUDIO menu
The headings used in the menus table
are designed to facilitate navigation
within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in the
control system displays.
You can select the functions in the standard display menu with button k
or j.
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently
have turned on.
The following functions are available:
If no audio equipment is currently turned
on, the message AUDIO OFF is shown in the
display.
The first function displayed in each
menu will automatically show you
which part of the system you are in.
Function
Page
Call up coolant temperature
display
112
Call up digital speedometer
120
Function
Page
Call up FSS
242
Select radio station
121
Check engine oil level
229
Operate CD player
121
Display digital speedometer
왘
Press button j twice.
The current vehicle speed is shown in
the multifunction display.
120
The following functions are available:
Controls in detail
Control system
Select radio station
왘
왘
Turn on the radio. Refer to separate operating instructions.
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned station in the display.
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired station is found.
Operate the CD player
왘
Turn on the radio and select the CD
player. Refer to separate operating instructions.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played are shown in the display.
The type of search depends on the setting for the station tuning:
앫
The next stored station is selected
(SP)
앫
Station search
i
1 Station
2 Waveband setting
3 Setting for station selection using
memory
You can only store new stations by using the corresponding feature on the
radio. Refer to separate operating instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the
usual manner.
1 Current track
2 Current CD (for CD changer)
왘
Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected.
i
To select a CD from the magazine,
press a number on the COMAND system key pad located in the center dashboard.
121
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
NAVI menu
Malfunction memory menu
The NAVI menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
Use the malfunction memory menu to scan
malfunction and warning messages that
may be stored in the system. The information shown in the display depends on
whether malfunctions have actually occurred.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the message NAVI in the
display.
앫
If the navigation system is off, the message NAVI OFF is shown in the display.
앫
If the navigation system is on, the message NAVI ACTIVE is shown in the display.
Please refer to the COMAND manual for instructions on how to activate the route
guidance system*.
122
Warning!
G
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are intentionally not very detailed. The malfunction
and warning messages are simply a reminder with respect to the operation of certain
systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
required maintenance and safety checks
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center to address the malfunction and warning messages (컄 page 260).
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until you see the malfunction message
memory in the display.
No malfunction messages
If no malfunctions have occurred, the message in the display is:
NO MALFUNCTION
Malfunctions have occurred
If malfunctions have occurred, you will see
the number of malfunctions in the display:
1 Number of malfunctions
왘
Press button k or j.
The stored messages will now be displayed in order. See the “Practical
hints” section for malfunction and
warning messages (컄 page 260).
Controls in detail
Control system
Should any malfunctions occur while driving, the number of malfunctions will reappear in the display when the SmartKey in
the starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
Settings menu
In the SETTINGS... menu there are two
functions:
앫
The function RESET: R BUTTON FOR
3 SEC., with which you can reset all the
settings to those set at the factory.
앫
A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
your vehicle.
왘
Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the SETTINGS... menu is seen in
the display.
i
The message memory will be cleared
when you turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 1 or 2. You
will then only see Priority 1 malfunctions (컄 page 260).
Resetting all settings
You can reset all the functions of all submenus to the factory settings.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 112) for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to confirm.
왘
Press the reset button again.
The functions of all the submenus will
reset to factory settings.
123
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Submenus in the Settings menu
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. Approximately five seconds after
pressing the reset button for the second time, the SETTINGS... menu reappears in the display.
왘
Press button k or j.
In the display you see the collection of
the submenus.
the LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE
function in the LIGHTING submenu
앫
the SETTINGS KEY- DEPENDENT function in the CONVENIENCE submenu
124
Move within the submenus with the k
or j button to the individual functions.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
For safety reasons, the following functions are not reset while driving:
앫
The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Scroll down with the ç button, scroll up
with the æ button.
왘
Press button ç.
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu.
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting the functions of a submenu
i
For each submenu you can reset all the
functions to the factory settings.
The settings you have changed will not
be reset unless you confirm the action
by pressing the reset button a second
time. Approximately five seconds after
pressing the reset button for the second time, the SETTINGS... menu reappears in the display.
왘
Move to a function in the submenu.
왘
Press the reset button in the instrument cluster (컄 page 112) for approximately three seconds.
In the display you will see the request
to press the reset button again to confirm.
왘
Press the reset button again.
All functions of the submenu will reset
to factory settings
125
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can
be changed within the various menus. Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
LIGHTING
Select time display mode
Set daytime running lamp mode Set station selection mode
(USA only)
(radio)
Activate easy-entry/exit feature
Select temperature display
mode
Set locator lighting
Set key-dependency
Select speedometer display
mode
Exterior lamps delayed
switch-off
Select language
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off
Select display (speed display or
outside temperature)
126
VEHICLE
Set automatic locking
CONVENIENCE
Set parking position for exterior
rear view mirror
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu
Selecting time display mode
Selecting temperature display mode
Access the INSTRUMENT CLUSTER menu via
the SETTINGS menu. Use the INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER submenu to change the instrument cluster display settings. The following functions are available:
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the
display: 12/24 HOUR.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEMP. INDICATOR.
Function
Page
Select time display mode
127
Select temperature display
mode
127
Select speedometer display
mode
128
Select language
128
Select display (speed display or 129
outside temperature)
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set the 12h or
24h time display mode.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set temperature
unit to degrees Celsius (°C) or degrees
Fahrenheit (°F).
127
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting speedometer display mode
Selecting language
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: DISPLAY VALUES IN.
왘
왘
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to set speedometer unit to KM or Miles.
128
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: TEXT.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
Available languages:
앫
German
앫
English
앫
French
앫
Italian
앫
Spanish
Controls in detail
Control system
Selecting display (speed display or outside temperature)
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: SELECT DISPLAY.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the display permanently shown in the multifunction display.
왘
Lighting submenu
Access the LIGHTING submenu via the SETTINGS menu. Use the LIGHTING submenu
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
your vehicle. The following functions are
available:
Function
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LIGHT CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT MODE.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Page
Set daytime running lamp mode 129
(USA only)
Set locator lighting
130
Exterior lamps delayed
switch-off
131
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off
132
Setting daytime running lamp mode
(USA only)
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press æ or ç to select manual
or daytime running lamp (constant)
mode. This function is not available in
countries where daytime running
lamps are mandatory.
With daytime running lamp mode selected and the exterior lamp switch at
position 0, the following lamps will
come on automatically when the engine is turned on:
앫
Parking lamps and low beam headlamps
앫
License plate lamps
컄컄
129
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄
i
Setting locator lighting
If you turn the exterior lamp switch to
another position, the corresponding
lamp(s) will switch on.
During darkness, the following lamps will
come on when the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the locator lighting feature is activated, and the vehicle is unlocked by SmartKey:
For safety reasons, resetting the
LIGHTING submenu to factory settings
(컄 page 123) will not reset the daytime
running lamp mode.
In the display you will then see the message: LIGHTING – CANNOT BE TOTALLY
RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS WHILE
DRIVING.
앫
parking lamps
앫
tail lamps
앫
license plate lamps
앫
front fog lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened. It switches off automatically after a period of approximately
40 seconds.
왘
130
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: LOCATOR LIGHTING.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired setting.
The locator lighting will be switched on
or off.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting night security illumination
i
(Exterior lamps delayed switch-off)
You can reactivate this function within
ten minutes by opening a door.
Use the HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF
function to set whether and for how long
you would like the exterior lamps to illuminate during darkness after all doors are
closed. When the delayed shut-off feature
is activated and the exterior lamp switch is
in position U, the following lamps will
remain lit after you remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch:
앫
parking lamps
앫
tail lamps
앫
license plate lamps
앫
front fog lamps
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on period.
You can select:
If you do not open a door after removing the SmartKey, the lamps will automatically switch off after 60 seconds.
앫
0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated
앫
15 s, 30 s, 45 s or 60 s, the delayed
switch-off feature is activated
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: HEADLIGHTS DELAYED SHUT-OFF.
왘
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Then turn it to position 2 and back
to 0.
You can temporarily deactivate the delayed switch-off feature:
The delayed switch-off feature is deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as you
reinsert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
131
Controls in detail
Control system
Interior lighting delayed switch-off
Vehicle submenu
Use this function to set whether and for
how long you would like the interior lighting to remain lit during darkness after the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
Access the VEHICLE submenu via the
SETINGS menu. Use the VEHICLE submenu
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the LIGHTING submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: INT. LIGHTING DELAYED
SHUT-OFF.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
to make general vehicle settings. The following functions are available:
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired lamp-on time period. You can select:
Function
Page
Set station selection mode
(radio)
132
앫
Set automatic locking
133
0 s, the delayed switch-off feature
is deactivated
앫
5 s, 10 s, 15 s or 20 s, the delayed
switch-off feature is activated
Setting station selection mode
Use the PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE
function to select the manual or memory
station selection mode for the radio.
왘
132
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
VEHICLE submenu.
Controls in detail
Control system
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: PRESS BUTTON IN AUDIO MODE.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Setting automatic locking
Convenience submenu
Use this function to activate or deactivate
the automatic central locking. With the automatic central locking system activated,
the vehicle is centrally locked at vehicle
speeds of approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h).
Access the CONVENIENCE submenu via the
SETTINGS menu. Use the CONVENIENCE sub-
왘
왘
Press æ or ç to select the desired station selection mode. You can
select:
앫
STATION SEARCH
앫
MEMORY selects next stored station
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the
Vehicle submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
Press æ or ç to switch function
ON or OFF.
menu to change the settings for a number
of convenience features. The following
functions are available:
Function
Page
Activate easy-entry/exit feature 133
Set key-dependency
135
Set parking position for exterior 135
rear view mirror
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature. When the
feature is activated, the steering wheel will
move back to facilitate exiting when you
앫
remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch
앫
open the driver’s door
However, the engine must be turned off.
133
Controls in detail
Control system
Warning!
G
Make sure no one can become trapped or injured by the moving steering wheel when
the easy-entry/exit feature is in operation
and the driver’s door is being opened or the
SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
After entering the vehicle, the steering
wheel will move into the position stored in
memory when
앫
the driver’s door is closed
앫
you put the SmartKey in the starter
switch and
앫
press the appropriate stored position
button on the memory switch
(컄 page 103)
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
i
왘
134
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: EASY-ENTRY FEATURE ACTIVATE.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Press æ or ç to change the
easy-entry/exit setting.
To cancel steering wheel movement,
do one of the following:
왘
앫
Move the steering column stalk
(컄 page 22)
The following settings are available for the
easy-entry/exit feature
앫
Press the memory switch
(컄 page 102)
OFF
The easy-entry/exit
feature is deactivated
STEERING COLUMN
The easy-entry/exit
feature is activated
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the CONVENIENCE submenu.
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting key-dependency
i
Use this function to set whether the memory settings for the seats, the steering
wheel and the exterior mirrors should be
stored separately for each SmartKey
(컄 page 101).
For safety reasons, resetting the SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT submenu to factory settings will not reset while
driving.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the CONVENIENCE submenu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: SETTINGS KEY-DEPENDENT.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
왘
왘
Move the selection marker with
the æ or ç button to the CONVENIENCE submenu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING.
In the display you will then see the message: CONVENIENCE – CANNOT BE TO-
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
TALLY RESET TO FACTORY SETTINGS
WHILE DRIVING.
Setting parking position for exterior rear
view mirror
Use the MIRROR SETTING WHEN PARKING
function to select whether the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror should be
turned downward during parking maneuvers when reverse gear is engaged. For
more information, see “Activating exterior
rear view mirror parking position”
(컄 page 153).
왘
Press æ or ç to switch function
ON or OFF.
Press æ or ç to set key dependency to ON or OFF.
135
Controls in detail
Control system
Trip computer menu
Fuel consumption statistics after start
Use the trip computer menu to call up statistical data on your vehicle. The following
information is available:
Function
Page
Fuel consumption statistics after 136
start
Fuel consumption statistics
since last reset
Fuel consumption since last reset
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the multifunction display: AFTER START.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: AFTER RESET.
136
Call up range (distance to empty) 137
1 Time elapsed since start
2 Average fuel consumption since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Distance driven since start
136
1 Time elapsed since last reset
2 Average fuel consumption since last reset
3 Average speed since last reset
4 Distance driven since last reset
Controls in detail
Control system
i
Call up range (distance to empty)
All statistics stored since the last engine start will be reset approximately
four hours after the SmartKey in the
starter switch is turned to position 0 or
removed from the starter switch.
왘
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
Resetting fuel consumption statistics
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see the reading that you want
to reset in the display.
왘
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 112) until
the value is reset to 0.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the first function of the
Trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the display: RANGE.
In the display you will see the calculated range based on the current fuel tank
level.
TEL menu
Warning!
G
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving. For your safety and the
safety of others, we recommend that you
pull over to a safe location and stop before
placing or taking a telephone call. If you
choose to use the telephone while driving,
please use the hands-free device and only
use the telephone when weather, road and
traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
컄컄
137
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
앫
If the telephone is on:
Answering a call
The telephone will then search for a
network. During this time the display is
empty.
When your telephone is ready to receive
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
the display you will then see the message:
As soon as the telephone has found a
network, READY is indicated in the display.
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
to operate your telephone, provided it is
connected to a hands-free system and
switched on.
왘
Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
왘
Press button ÿ or è on the
steering wheel repeatedly until you see
the TEL menu in the display.
Which messages will appear in the display
field depends on whether your telephone is
switched on or off:
앫
If the telephone is off, the message in
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF.
138
왘
Press button í.
You have answered the call. In the display you see the length of the call.
1 Signal strength
This standby message indicates that your
telephone is ready for use and you can operate it using the control system.
Ending a call
왘
Press button ì.
You have ended the call. In the display
you will again see the standby message.
Controls in detail
Control system
Dialing a number from the phone book
i
Redialing
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
If you press and hold j or k for
longer than one second, the system
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
until you release the button again.
The control system stores the most recently dialed phone numbers. This eliminates
the need to search through your entire
phone book.
Cancel the quick search mode by
pressing ì.
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.
왘
Press button í.
왘
왘
Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
until you see the TEL menu in the display.
Press button j or k.
The control system reads the phone
book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take up to 30 seconds. In the
display you will see the message
PLEASE WAIT!.
왘
Press button í.
The system dials the selected phone
number.
앫
When the message PLEASE WAIT! disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
왘
If connection is successful, the
name of the party you called and
the duration of the call will appear
in the display.
왘
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
왘
Press button í.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the
display.
The stored names are displayed in ascending or descending alphabetical order.
In the display, you see the first number
in the redial memory.
앫
If no connection is made, the control system stores the dialed number in the redial memory.
139
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
왔 Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an automatic transmission, see the “Getting
started” section (컄 page 43).
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent
upon
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear
shifting process to your individual driving
style by continually adjusting the shift
points up or down. These shift point adjustments are performed based on current operating and driving conditions.
앫
the gear selector lever position D with
gear ranges 4, 3, 2, 1 (컄 page 142)
앫
transfer case position (HIGH or LOW)
앫
the position of the accelerator pedal
(컄 page 144)
If the operating conditions change, the automatic transmission reacts by adjusting
its gear shift program.
앫
the vehicle speed
i
The current gear selector lever position
and the transfer case position (HIGH or
LOW) appear in the multifunction display.
During the brief warm-up, transmission
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
catalytic converter to heat up more
quickly to operating temperature.
1 Transfer case display
2 Gear selector lever position/gear
range
140
Warning!
G
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector
lever out of P or N if the engine speed is
higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
When the gear selector lever is in
position D, you can influence transmission
shifting by
앫
limiting the gear range
앫
changing gears manually
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
One-touch gearshifting
Even with an automatic transmission, you
can change the gears manually when the
gear selector lever is in position D.
Downshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the left in the D– direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next lower gear. This action simultaneously limits the gear range of the
transmission (컄 page 142).
Warning!
G
i
Canceling gear range limit
To avoid overrevving the engine when
the gear selector lever is moved to the
D- direction, the transmission will not
shift to a lower gear if the engine’s
max. speed would be exceeded.
왘
Upshifting
왘
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear to the next higher gear as permitted
by the shift program. This action simultaneously extends the gear range of the
transmission.
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
the multifunction display.
The transmission will shift from the current
gear range directly to gear range D.
Shifting into optimal gear range
왘
Press and hold the gear selector lever
in the D- direction.
The transmission will automatically select
the gear range suited for optimal acceleration and deceleration. This will involve
shifting down one or more gears.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
141
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Gear ranges
With the gear selector lever in position D,
you can limit the transmission’s gear range
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
left (D-), and reverse the gear range limit
by pressing the gear selector lever to the
right (D+).
The selected gear range will appear in the
multifunction display. If you press on the
accelerator when the engine has reached
its rpm limit, the transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Effect
é
The transmission shifts
through fourth gear only.
è
The transmission shifts
through third gear only.
With this selection you can
use the braking effect of the
engine.
ç
Allows the use of engine’s
braking power when driving
!
If the transfer case is in off-road driving
position LOW, the automatic transmission will not shift up automatically,
even when the engine has reached the
speed limit for that gear. There is a risk
of damaging the engine.
It is very important to make sure the
permissible engine speed is not exceeded.
142
The transmission shifts
through second gear only.
æ
앫
on steep downgrades
앫
in mountainous regions
앫
under extreme operating
conditions
The transmission operates in
first gear only.
For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep
or lengthy downgrades.
Gear selector lever position
Effect
ì Park position
Gear selector lever position
when the vehicle is parked. Place
gear selector lever in position P
only when vehicle is stopped.
The park position is not intended
to serve as a brake when the
vehicle is parked. Rather, the
driver should always set the
parking brake in addition to
placing the gear selector lever in
position P to secure the vehicle.
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Effect
The SmartKey can only be
removed from the starter switch
with the gear selector lever in
position P. With the SmartKey
removed, the gear selector lever
is locked in position P.
If the vehicle’s electrical system
is malfunctioning, the gear
selector lever could remain
locked in position P
(컄 page 290).
Effect
ë Neutral
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive axle. When
the brakes are released, the
vehicle can be moved freely
(pushed or towed).
Do not engage N while driving
except:
Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any
other reason with gear selector lever
in N can result in transmission damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Warning!
G
앫
to coast when vehicle is in
danger of skidding (e.g. on
icy roads) when the ESP is
deactivated or malfunctioning
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear selector lever not fully engaged in position P is
dangerous. Also, position P alone is not intended to or capable of preventing your vehicle from moving, possibly hitting people or
objects.
앫
when you have to shift the
transfer case
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to position P (컄 page 51).
í Reverse gear
Place gear selector lever in
position R only when vehicle is
stopped.
!
ê Drive
The transmission shifts
automatically. All five forward
gears are available.
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
143
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission
Warning!
G
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, and lock
the vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could move the
gear selector lever from position P, which
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Accelerator position
Your driving style influences the transmission’s shifting behavior:
Less throttle
Earlier upshifting
More throttle
Later upshifting
Kickdown
Use kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
왘
Press the accelerator past the point of
resistance.
The transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
왘
Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed.
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode)
If vehicle acceleration worsens or the
transmission no longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in limp
home (emergency operation) mode. In this
mode, only 2nd gear and reverse gear can
be activated.
왘
Stop the vehicle.
왘
Move gear selector lever to P.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting.
왘
Restart the engine.
왘
Move gear selector lever to position D
(for second gear) or R.
왘
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
The transmission shifts up again.
144
Controls in detail
Transfer case
왔 Transfer case
For more information on off-road driving,
see “Off-road driving” (컄 page 213).
Gear range
H
HIGH
Road position
L
LOW
Off-road position
This position is intended for
driving off-road and step gradients.
N
Neutral
No power is transmitted from
the engine to the drive axle.
Switching transfer case
The switch is located in the center console.
1 Transfer case indicator
2 Gear range indicator
Transfer case indicator 1 in the multifunction display shows the gear position of
the transfer case.
The transmission will not upshift automatically to the next
higher gear range when driving
at the rpm limit.
The transfer case supports the
engine’s driving force (approx.
1
/2 speed). Output is therefore increased.
145
Controls in detail
Transfer case
Switching from HIGH to LOW
왘
왘
Switching from LOW to HIGH
!
!
The shift procedure can only be performed when:
The shift procedure can only be performed when:
앫
The engine is running.
앫
The engine is running.
앫
The gear selector lever for the automatic transmission is in position N.
앫
The gear selector lever for the automatic transmission is in position N.
앫
The vehicle is not at standstill.
앫
The vehicle is not at standstill.
앫
The vehicle speed does not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
앫
The vehicle speed does not exceed
40 mph (70 km/h).
Press upper half (“LOW”) of the transfer case switch.
왘
Once the shift is complete, gear
position H is displayed in the transfer
case indicator.
i
i
If the shift procedure does not take
place press upper half (“LOW”) of the
transfer case switch again.
If the shift procedure does not take
place press lower half (“HIGH”) of the
transfer case switch again.
146
왘
If a shift was not completed and the multifunction display shows one of the following
messages:
앫
TC SHIFT CONDITIONS NOT FULFILLED
The shift did not take place. At least
one shift condition was not met.
왘
Repeat the shift procedure.
앫
TC IN NEUTRAL
The shift did not take place. The transfer case is in neutral. The gear
position N is displayed in the transfer
case indicator 1.
Press lower half (“HIGH”) of the transfer case switch.
Once the shift is complete, gear
position L is displayed in the transfer
case indicator.
Put gear selector in D.
Messages in the multifunction display
Put gear selector in D.
왘
Repeat the shift procedure.
Warning!
G
If TC is in neutral, transmission position P
will not hold vehicle. The parking brake must
be applied to hold vehicle in place.
Controls in detail
Transfer case
앫
TC SHIFT – CANCELLED
i
The shift did not take place.
왘
Repeat the shift procedure.
앫
TRANSFER CASE – VISIT WORKSHOP!
If the SmartKey is in starter switch
position 0 or 1, an alarm will sound if
the transfer case is in position N and
the driver’s door is opened.
There may be a malfunction in the system.
Engage transfer case to gear position
HIGH or LOW.
왘
Repeat the shift procedure.
왘
If the shift procedure still does not take
place, have the vehicle checked at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
For more information, see “Practical hints”
section (컄 page 281).
147
Controls in detail
Differential locks
왔 Differential locks
For more information on off-road driving,
see “Off-road driving” (컄 page 213).
Differential locks improve the vehicle’s
tractive power off-road. Switch on differential locks:
앫
for off-road driving
앫
to turn the ABS off during off-road driving
!
When driving off-road, apply only moderate pressure to the accelerator pedal
if the differential locks are switched on.
When running on a (single-axle) dynamometer – no matter how briefly – you
must:
앫
raise the non-driven axle
앫
for driving through water
or
앫
when driving on deep snow and icy or
fouled surfaces
앫
and
!
앫
Do not engage the front axle differential lock when driving around tight corners. This restricts steering ability.
Otherwise the transfer case can be
damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
148
disconnect its drive shaft
engage the transfer differential lock
Warning!
G
Never drive on pavement with differential
locks engaged.
Steering control will be strongly affected
with the differential locks activated.
The ABS, BAS and ESP are switched off automatically when the transfer case differential lock is activated.
Controls in detail
Differential locks
A few words about differentials and
differential locks
When a vehicle negotiates a turn, wheels
on the outside of the curve must travel farther and rotate faster than the inside
wheels. The differential, the operation of a
set of gears that allows the powered
wheels in a vehicle to turn at different
speeds, makes this essential function possible.
The drawback is that the differential also
sends most of the engine’s power to the
wheel with the least load or strain on it. For
example, if one of a vehicle’s powered
wheels sits on a patch of snow and spins
because there is no traction, all of the engine’s power will go to that wheel because
the power will take the path of least resistance. Meanwhile, the opposite wheel, sitting on dry pavement where it could get
enough grip to start the vehicle moving,
sits idle because it receives no power.
The Electronic Traction System (ETS) addresses this problem and provides for
good control and steering ability by automatically slowing the slipping wheel and
thus increasing the power to the other
non-slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle
moving. The ESP and ETS in this vehicle
feature such intelligent limited-slip differential technology, ideally suited for
on-road and light off-road driving. Transfer
case position LOW (컄 page 145) also enhances off-road driving capabilities
(컄 page 213).
More extreme off-road conditions may call
for another solution, engaging a differential lock or preventing the differential from
operating altogether. As part of its standard equipment, this vehicle comes with
three differential locks: front, transfer case
(center) and rear. Each can be engaged
simply by pushing dashboard-mounted
buttons in sequential order (center, rear,
front) (컄 page 150). When the transfer
case (center) differential is locked, half of
the engine’s power is automatically distributed to the front wheels and half to the
rear wheels. When the rear differential is
locked, power going to the rear wheels is
equally distributed, so that both rear
wheels turn at the same speed and torque.
When the front differential is locked, all
four wheels now turn with equal power and
torque. Please be aware that engaging the
differential locks will significantly reduce
the steering ability of the vehicle.
For your safety and the safety of others
and to prevent damage to the vehicle, the
differential locks must not be engaged
when driving on paved roads. It is important to understand that during
on-road/paved driving, differentials are
absolutely necessary for providing the essential control and steering ability of the
vehicle. The differential locks, therefore,
must not be engaged when driving on
paved roads and should only be used to
the extent necessary to negotiate off-road
conditions which cannot be handled by the
systems (automatic 4-ETS, the ESP, manual switch position “LOW” of transfer case)
this vehicle comes equipped with.
149
Controls in detail
Differential locks
Switching differential locks on and off
Switching differential locks on
!
The switch is located in the center console.
To avoid damage to the transfer case
and differential locks:
앫
1 Transfer case (center) differential lock
2 Rear axle differential lock
3 Front differential lock
4 Engagement indicator lamps (yellow)
5 Function indicator lamps (red)
i
The differential locks can only be
switched on in the sequence 1,
2, 3.
150
Engage differential locks only at low
speed (walking speed, not more
than 5 mph).
앫
Do not engage differential locks if
the driving wheels are spinning due
to lack of traction.
앫
Do not engage on paved roads.
The message ABS NOT AVAILABLE –
DIFFERENTIAL LOCKED appears in the
multifunction display.
The ESP warning lamp v and the
ABS - warning lamp in the instrument cluster come on.
Once the transfer case differential lock
is switched on, you can now, if needed,
앫
or
앫
Transfer case differential lock
왘
Press switch 1.
The yellow engagement indicator
lamp 4 for the transfer case differential lock comes on.
The ESP warning lamp v comes on.
When the differential lock engagement
operation has been completed, the red
function indicator lamp 5 comes on.
switch on rear axle differential
lock 2
switch on rear axle differential lock
and front differential lock 2
and 3.
Controls in detail
Differential locks
Rear axle differential lock
왘
Press switch 2.
The yellow engagement indicator
lamp 4 comes on first, followed by the
red function indicator lamp 5.
The rear axle differential lock is
switched on.
Front differential lock
왘
Press switch 3.
The yellow engagement indicator
lamp 4 comes on first, followed by the
red function indicator lamp 5.
The front differential lock is switched
on.
Switching differential locks off
There are two different methods to disengage differential locks:
앫
You can switch the differential locks off
in reverse order (3, 2, 1).
앫
To switch off all differential locks at the
same time:
왘
Press switch 1.
The yellow engagement indicator
lamps 4 go out first. The red function indicator lamps 5 go out
when the switching process has
been carried out in the differential.
To activate the ESP, BAS and ABS systems,
drive again for three seconds using a constant driving style.
All messages in the multifunction display
disappear. The ESP warning lamp v
and the ABS - warning lamp in the instrument cluster go out.
i
If the function lamps do not go out
when the differential locks are disengaged, bring vehicle to a stop and then
continue driving. Changing the vehicle
load can help to disengage locks.
Warning!
G
Always remember to disengage the differential locks when returning to drive on paved
roads, see “A few words about differentials
and differential locks” (컄 page 149).
151
Controls in detail
Good visibility
왔 Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see
“Windshield wipers” (컄 page 47) and for
setting the exterior rear view mirrors, see
“Exterior rear view mirror” (컄 page 38).
Rear view mirror
Automatic antiglare rear view mirrors
The reflection brightness of the exterior
rear view mirrors and the interior rear view
mirror will respond automatically to glare
when
앫
the ignition is switched on, and
앫
incoming light from headlamps falls on
the sensor in the interior rear view mirror
The interior rear view mirror will not react if
앫
reverse gear is engaged
앫
the interior lighting is turned on
152
Warning!
G
Warning!
G
The automatic antiglare function does not
react if incoming light is not aimed directly
at sensors in the interior rear view mirror.
In the case of an accident, liquid electrolyte
may escape from the mirror housing if the
mirror glass breaks.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirrors do not react, for example,
if the cargo compartment is fully loaded.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not allow the liquid to come into contact with
eyes, skin, clothing, or the respiratory system. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical
help if necessary.
Glare can endanger you and others.
Warning!
G
Exercise care when using the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
are closer than they appear. Check your inside rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position
Headlamp cleaning system
The switch is located to the left of the
steering column.
Follow these steps to activate the mirror
parking position so that the passenger-side exterior rear view mirror will be
turned downward to the stored position.
왘
Make sure you stored a parking position for the passenger-side exterior
rear view mirror (컄 page 103).
왘
Make sure the MIRROR SETTING WHEN
PARKING function, found under the CONVENIENCE submenu in the control system, is switched to ON (컄 page 135).
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
button
2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mirror button
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Press button 2 for the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror.
The exterior rear view mirror returns to its
previously stored driving position:
왘
Switch on ignition.
앫
왘
Press switch 1.
Place the gear selector lever in reverse
gear R.
10 seconds after you put the gear selector lever out of position R
앫
immediately once you exceed a vehicle
speed of approx. 6 mph (10 km/h)
앫
immediately when you press button 1
for driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
왘
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror will be turned downward to the
stored position.
1 Headlamp washer switch
The headlamps will be cleaned with a
high-pressure water jet.
153
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Sun visors
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
while driving.
Warning!
G
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare
can endanger you and others.
154
1 Sun visor
2 Mounting
왘
Swing sun visors 1 down to protect
against sun glare.
왘
If sunlight enters through a side window, disengage visor 1 from inner
mounting 2 and pivot it to the side.
3 Mirror cover
4 Mirror lamp
왘
Make sure the ignition is switched on
and that the sun visor is engaged in
mounting 2.
왘
Open mirror cover 3.
Mirror lamps 4 switch on.
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster
!
i
Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2.
Heavy accumulation of snow and ice
should be removed before activating
the defroster.
The rear window defroster uses a large
amount of power. To keep the battery
drain to a minimum, turn off the defroster as soon as the rear window is
clear.
Activating
왘
Press button F in the control panel
of the climate control.
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on.
Deactivating
왘
Press button F in the control panel
of the climate control.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
The defroster is automatically turned
off after approximately 6-17 minutes of
operation depending on the outside
temperature and vehicle speed.
If several power consumers are turned
on simultaneously, or the battery is
only partially charged, it is possible that
the defroster will automatically turn itself off.
When this happens, the indicator lamp
inside the switch starts blinking.
As soon as the battery has sufficient
voltage, the defroster turns itself back
on.
155
Controls in detail
Climate control
왔 Climate control
156
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Windshield defroster air vents
1 Air volume
2 Center air vent, adjustable
2 Temperature control, left
3 Thumbwheel for center air vent
3 Temperature control, right
4 Side air vent, adjustable
4 Air distribution control
5 Side defroster air vent, fixed
5 Rear window defroster (컄 page 155)
6 Thumbwheel for side air vent
6 AC cooling on /off (ACOFF)
7 Footwell air vents
8 Climate control panel
i
For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders for the center air vents to the middle position.
Climate control panel
Residual engine heat utilization
(REST)
7 Air distribution and air volume (automatic mode)
8 Air recirculation
9 Defrosting
157
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenever the engine is running. You can operate
the climate control system in either the automatic or manual mode. The system cools
or heats the interior depending on the selected interior temperature and the current outside temperature.
Warning!
G
When operating the automatic climate control, the air that enters the passenger compartment through the air vents in the
footwell can be very hot or very cold (depending on the set temperature). This may
cause burns or frostbite on unprotected skin
in the immediate area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient distance between unprotected parts of the body and the footwell
air vents. If necessary, change the air flow
using the air distribution controls to direct
the air away from the footwell air vents
(컄 page 159).
158
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
odors are filtered out before outside air enters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the ACOFF mode is selected
(컄 page 162).
Warning!
G
Follow the recommended settings for heating and cooling given on the following pages. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and
others.
i
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate
the interior before driving off.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris.
Setting the temperature
Use temperature controls 2 and 3 to
separately adjust the air temperature on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You should raise or lower the temperature
setting in small increments, preferably
starting at 72°F (22°C).
i
When operating the climate control
system in automatic mode, you will
only rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume and air distribution.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Increasing
Adjusting air distribution and volume
Adjusting manually
왘
Use air distribution control 4
(컄 page 157) to adjust the air distribution.
The following symbols are found on the
controls:
왘
Turn the temperature control a few degrees to the right.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
Decreasing
왘
Turn the temperature control a few degrees to the left.
The climate control system will correspondingly adjust the interior air temperature.
Symbol
Function
a
Directs air through the center,
side and rear passenger compartment air vents
Z
X
Directs air to the windows
Y
Directs air to the footwells
Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
out.
왘
Select any of the six air volume speeds
and the air distribution.
Directs air into the entire vehicle interior
159
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting automatically
왘
Defrosting
Press the U button.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. Air distribution and volume
are adjusted automatically.
Activating
왘
The indicator lamp in the button illuminates.
Windshield fogged on the outside
왘
Switch the windshield wipers on.
왘
Switch to manual mode.
왘
Turn the air distribution control
to a or Y.
Press button P.
The climate control automatically
switches to the following functions:
앫
maximum blower and heat output
앫
air distribution to the windshield
and the side windows
앫
rear ventilation is turned off
Deactivating
왘
Press the P button.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
160
Air recirculation
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside. This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
air in the passenger compartment.
Warning!
G
When the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), only switch to air recirculation
mode for short periods to prevent window
fogging.
Activating
왘
Press button O briefly.
The indicator lamp in the button illuminates.
Controls in detail
Climate control
i
The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside temperatures.
If you have turned off the air conditioner or the outside temperature is below
41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode
will not switch on automatically.
Residual engine heat utilization
With the engine switched off, it is possible
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
for a short while, depending on the temperature setting of the climate control. Air volume and distribution are controlled
automatically.
Deactivating
왘
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off:
앫
when the SmartKey in starter switch is
turned to position 2
앫
after about 30 minutes
앫
if the battery voltage drops
Activating
Deactivating
왘
왘
Press button O briefly.
The indicator lamp in the button goes
out.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in starter switch to
position 1 or 0 or remove it from the
starter switch.
Press button ° again to switch off.
Press button °.
The air recirculation mode is deactivated
automatically:
The indicator lamp in the button comes
on.
앫
after 30 minutes if the outside temperature is above about 41°F (5°C)
Set the left and right temperature to
your personal requirements.
앫
after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is below about 41°F (5°C)
앫
after 5 minutes if economy mode
ACOFF is selected
161
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control
system
Deactivating
왘
Air conditioning
The air conditioning is operational while
the engine is running and cools the interior
air to the temperature set by the operator.
Set the air volume control switch to
position 0.
i
Condensation may drip out from underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Reactivating
왘
Set the air volume control switch to any
speed.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the air with the air conditioner.
왘
Press button ° again.
The indicator lamp on the button °
goes out.
The air conditioner uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
Deactivating
!
It is possible to deactivate the air conditioning (cooling) function of the climate
control system. The air in the vehicle will
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
If the ° button on the climate control panel starts to blink, this indicates
that the air conditioner is losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned itself
off. The air conditioner cannot be
turned on again.
왘
Press button °.
The indicator lamp on the button °
comes on.
162
Activating
앫
Have the air conditioner checked at
the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Controls in detail
Climate control
Rear passenger compartment
adjustable air vents
1 Air volume control for center air vents
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Right center air vent, adjustable
163
Controls in detail
Power windows
왔 Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
Warning!
The side windows can be opened and
closed electrically. The switches for all the
side windows are on the driver’s door. The
switches for the respective windows are
on the front passenger and the rear doors.
G
164
왘
When closing the windows, make sure there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by the
closing procedure.
The closing procedure can be immediately
halted by releasing the switch or by releasing button ‹ on the SmartKey.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
1 Switch for rear door window override
(컄 page 71)
2 Left front window
3 Right front window
4 Right rear window
5 Left rear window
Opening the windows
왘
Press switch 2 to 5 to the resistance
point.
The corresponding window will move
downwards until you release the
switch.
Closing the windows
왘
Pull on switch 2 to 5.
The corresponding window will move
upwards until you release the switch.
Fully opening windows (Express-open)
왘
Press switch 2 to 5 past the resistance point and release.
The corresponding window opens completely.
Turn SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 1 or 2.
Stopping windows
왘
Press or pull respective switch again.
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing windows with the
SmartKey
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘
The sliding/pop-up roof (컄 page 166) will
also be opened or closed when the power
windows are operated with the SmartKey.
Warning!
G
Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately one
second.
왘
Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to close after approximately one
second.
왘
Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button on the SmartKey.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘
Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
handle.
165
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
왔 Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof
Warning!
!
G
To avoid damaging the seals, do not
transport any objects with sharp edges
which can stick out of the
sliding/pop-up roof.
When closing the sliding/pop-up roof, make
sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the closing procedure.
Do not open the sliding/pop-up roof if
there is snow or ice on the roof, as this
could result in malfunctions.
The closing procedure of the sliding/pop-up
roof can be immediately halted by releasing
the switch.
1 Push up to raise roof at rear
2 Pull down to lower roof at rear
3 Push forward to slide roof closed
4 Push back to slide roof open
With the roof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
guard against sun rays. When sliding the
roof open, the screen will also retract.
166
The sliding/pop-up roof can be opened
or closed manually should an electrical
malfunction occur (컄 page 292).
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from starter switch, and lock your
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment can cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
i
You can also open or close the
sliding/pop-up roof using the
SmartKey (summer opening/convenience feature) (컄 page 167).
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof
왘
Fully opening (Express-open)
왘
To open, close, raise or lower the sliding/pop-up roof, move the switch to
the resistance point in the required
direction 1 to 4.
Release the switch when the roof has
reached the required position.
To open the sliding/pop-up roof, move
the switch past the resistance point in
direction 4 and release.
The sliding/pop up roof opens completely.
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up
roof with the SmartKey
The power windows (컄 page 164) will also
be opened or closed when you operate the
sliding/pop-up roof with the SmartKey.
Warning!
Stopping the sliding/pop-up roof
왘
Move the switch in any direction.
i
If the movement of the sliding/pop-up
roof is blocked during the closing procedure, the roof will stop and reopen
slightly.
G
Never operate the windows or sliding/pop-up roof if there is the possibility of
anyone being harmed by the opening or
closing procedure.
In case the procedure causes potential danger, the procedure can be immediately halted by releasing the button on the SmartKey.
To reverse direction of movement,
press Œ for opening or ‹ for closing.
왘
Aim transmitter eye at the driver’s door
handle.
167
Controls in detail
Sliding/pop-up roof
Opening (Summer opening feature)
왘
Press and hold button Πafter unlocking the vehicle.
Closing (Convenience feature)
왘
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to open after approximately one
second.
왘
Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Press and hold button ‹ after locking the vehicle.
The windows and sliding/pop-up roof
begin to close after approximately one
second.
왘
Release transmit button to interrupt
procedure.
Make sure all side windows and the sliding/pop-up roof are properly closed before
leaving the vehicle.
168
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are described on the following pages:
앫
Cruise control, with which the vehicle
can maintain a preset speed.
앫
Rear Parking Assist*, with which you
can assist your parking maneuvers.
The BAS, ABS, ESP, 4-ETS and EBB driving
systems are described in the “Safety and
Security” section (컄 page 74).
Cruise control
Warning!
Cruise control automatically maintains the
speed you set for your vehicle.
Use of cruise control is recommended for
driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time. You can set or resume
cruise control at any speed over 20 mph
(30 km/h).
The cruise control function is operated by
means of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the
steering column (컄 page 23).
i
G
Cruise control is a convenience system designed to assist the driver during vehicle operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle speed
and for safe brake operation.
Only use cruise control if the road, traffic
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic
because conditions do not allow safe
driving at a steady speed.
앫
The use of cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes in
tire traction can result in wheel spin and
loss of control.
앫
Deactivate cruise control when driving
in fog.
The cruise control should not be activated during-off road driving.
The “Resume” function should only be operated if the driver is fully aware of the previously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.
169
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i
!
On uphill or downhill grades, cruise
control may not be able to maintain the
set speed. Once the grade eases, the
set speed will be resumed.
Moving gear selector lever to
position N while driving also cancels
cruise control. However, the gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast
when the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads).
Canceling cruise control
There are several ways to cancel cruise
control:
1 Set current or higher speed
2 Set current or lower speed
3 Cancel cruise control
4 Resume at last set speed
Setting current speed
왘
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
왘
Briefly lift 1 or depress 2 the cruise
control lever.
The current speed is set.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
Cruise control is activated.
170
왘
Step on the brake pedal.
or
왘
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 3.
Cruise control will be canceled. The
last speed set will be stored for later
use.
i
The last stored speed is canceled when
you turn off the engine.
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed
i
왘
When you use the cruise control lever
to decelerate, the transmission will automatically downshift if the engine’s
braking power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
왘
Lift the cruise control lever to
position 1 and hold it up until the desired speed is reached.
Release the cruise control lever.
The new speed is set.
i
Depressing the accelerator pedal does
not deactivate the cruise control. After
brief acceleration (e.g. for passing), the
cruise control will resume the last
speed set.
Setting a lower speed
왘
Depress the cruise control lever to
position 2 and hold it down until the
desired speed is reached.
왘
Release the cruise control lever.
Fine adjustment in 1 mph
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Setting to last stored speed
(“Resume” function)
Warning!
G
The speed stored in memory should only be
set again if prevailing road conditions permit. Possible acceleration or deceleration
differences arising from returning to preset
speed could endanger yourself and others.
Faster
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 1.
왘
Cruise control will resume the last set
speed.
Slower
왘
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in the
direction of arrow 2.
Briefly push the cruise control lever to
position 4.
왘
Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The new speed is set.
171
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Rear Parking Assist*
Warning!
G
Rear Parking Assist (rear Parktronic) is a
supplemental system. It is not intended to,
nor does it replace, the need for extreme
care. The responsibility during parking and
other critical maneuvers always rests with
the driver.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or
street curbs). Such objects may not be detected by the system and can damage the
vehicle.
The operational function of the Rear Parking
Assist can be affected by dirty sensors, especially at times of snow and ice. See
“Cleaning the Rear Parking Assist sensors”
(컄 page 247).
172
Interference caused by other ultrasonic signals (e.g. working jackhammers or the air
brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
send erratic indications, and should be taken into consideration.
Warning!
The Rear Parking Assist system monitors
the rear area of your vehicle by means of
four sensors in the rear bumper.
G
Make sure no persons or animals are in the
area in which you are maneuvering. You
could otherwise injure them.
The Rear Parking Assist system is an electronic aid designed to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. It visually and
audibly indicates the relative distance between the rear of the vehicle and an obstacle.
The Rear Parking Assist system is automatically activated when you switch on the
ignition and shift the gear selector lever to
position R.
1 Sensors
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Range of the sensors
Center
approx. 59.1 in (150 cm)
Minimum distance
To function properly, the sensors must be
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
sensors regularly, being careful not to
scratch or damage them.
Corners
approx. 40 in (100 cm)
The minimum distance between the sensors and an obstacle is approximately
20 in (50 cm). If you encounter an obstacle
in this range, all the warning lamps come
on and you hear a warning signal. If the obstacle is closer than the minimum distance, the actual distance may no longer
be indicated by the system.
!
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or
below the height of the sensors (e.g.
planters or trailer hitches). The Rear
Parking Assist system will not detect
such objects at close range and damage to your vehicle or the object may
result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g. truck air brakes or jackhammers) may impair the operation of the
Rear Parking Assist system.
173
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning indicator
Visual signals indicate to the driver the relative distance between the sensors and an
obstacle. The warning indicator is located
next to the tailgate.
Warning indicator
As your vehicle approaches an object, one
or more segments will come on, depending
on the distance. When the sixth segment
lights, you have reached the minimum distance.
174
An intermittent acoustic warning will
sound when the first yellow segment
comes on. This signal quickens with each
additional segment lit. When all segments
illuminate, the acoustic warning becomes
a constant signal. The signal is canceled
when the gear selector lever is placed in
position D or P.
앫
Rear Parking Assist malfunction
There is a malfunction in the Rear Parking
Assist system if:
Malfunction may also be caused by interference from other radio or ultrasonic signals.
앫
왘
a low warning tone sounds while the
vehicle is reversing
The Rear Parking Assist sensors are
dirty or malfunctioning.
왘
Clean the Rear Parking Assist system sensors (컄 page 247).
왘
Switch on the ignition again.
no segments come on and no warning
sounds
The Rear Parking Assist is malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Rear Parking Assist system checked by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Check the Rear Parking Assist operation at another location to rule out interference from outside radio or
ultrasonic signals.
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Roof rack
Cargo compartment cover
This vehicle is not intended to carry items
on its roof. Thus roof rails and any
roof-mounted devices must not be used.
Warning!
Rolling up the cover
왘
Grip the cover strap and remove it from
the mountings on both sides.
왘
Guide it slowly back into place.
G
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
could result in an accident.
1 Rear seat bench cover
2 Tailgate cover
왘
Pull cover 1 out. Hook it into the
mountings on the rear seat bench.
왘
Pull cover 2 out. Hook it into the
mountings to the left and right of the
tailgate.
175
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing and installing the cover
Enlarged cargo compartment
Split rear seat bench
The rear seat bench can be folded and lowered to increase the cargo compartment.
The left, right or both seat backrests sections may folded down according to need.
Warning!
Removing the cover
왘
왘
Open latch 1 on right and left side in
direction of arrow.
Pull cover 2 out upwards.
Installing the cover
왘
Place cover into recesses.
왘
Press right and left sides of cover down
until it locks into place.
176
G
Always lock seat backrest in its upright position when rear seat bench is occupied by
passengers, or cargo is being carried behind
the seat bench.
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
objects flying in the occupant area during a
collision or sudden maneuver, always use
partition net when transporting cargo
(컄 page 178).
For more information, see “Split rear seat
bench” (컄 page 176).
1 Lever for seat backrest sections
2 Lever for seat bench sections
The rear seat bench can be folded and lowered to enlarge the cargo compartment.
The left, right or both seat backrest sections may be folded down as required.
Controls in detail
Loading
Warning!
G
Failure to assure that seats and seat backrest are locked into place could result in an
increased chance of injury in an accident.
Never place hands under seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
For safety reasons, the rear seat bench
must only be adjusted when the vehicle is
stationary.
Never ride vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
Folding seat backrest forward
왘
왘
Remove the head restraints
(컄 page 96).
Pull release lever 1 in direction of arrow and fold seat backrest forward until it locks in place.
Folding seat bench forward
왘
Fold seat backrest forward.
왘
Pull release lever 2 in direction of arrow and fold seat bench forward together with the seat backrest.
Returning seat bench and seat backrest to sitting position
왘
Fold up seat bench until it locks in
place.
왘
Pull release lever 1 and raise seat
backrest until it locks in place.
왘
Check to ensure the seat is locked by
pushing and pulling on the seat backrest.
Warning!
G
Failure to assure that seats and seat backrests are locked into place could result in an
increased chance of injury in an accident.
!
Before folding the seat backrest forward and the rear seat bench down, be
sure that all containers in the rear cup
holder are removed.
177
Controls in detail
Loading
Partition net* (MB Accessory)
Use of the partition net is a particularly important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat
backrests with smaller objects.
While the partition net will help protect you
from smaller objects, it cannot prevent the
movement of large, heavier objects into
the passenger area in an accident. Such
items must be properly secured using the
cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.
The partition net can be installed behind
the seat backrests of the rear seat bench,
or behind the front seats if the rear seat
bench is folded down.
Installation behind rear seat bench
i
Installation can be performed by opening the rear doors.
1 Partition net
2 Mounting
왘
Fold the rear seat bench forward
(컄 page 176).
i
This cannot be done by folding the rear
seat backrest forward.
왘
178
Hook partition net 1 in mountings 2
on both sides.
Controls in detail
Loading
Installation behind front seats
3 Lift tensioner
4 Tie down
5 Hook
6 Ring
Lift tensioner 3 on tie downs 4 must
point in the direction of the arrow.
왘
왘
Set the length of the tie downs 4 and
lift tensioner 3 to the rings 6.
왘
Fold rear seat bench fully forward
(컄 page 176).
왘
Engage partition net 1 in holders 2.
Insert tie down hooks 5 in rings 6.
Pull on loose ends of tie downs until net
is slightly tensioned.
왘
1 Partition net
2 Mounting
Fold up seat bench until it locks in
place.
The partition net will be tightened by
the rear seat bench cushion.
After driving a short period, check the tension of the partition net, retighten if necessary.
179
컄컄
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄
Removing partition net
왘
Lift tensioner upward to a horizontal
position to release tensioning of strap.
왘
Disengage tie down hooks from rings.
왘
Remove partition net from holders.
Loading instructions
Storing partition net
3 Lift tensioner
4 Tie down
5 Hook
6 Ring
Lift tensioner 3 must point in the direction of the cargo compartment.
왘
Set the length of tie downs 4 and lift
tensioner 3 to the rings 6.
왘
Insert tie down hooks 5 in rings 6.
왘
Pull loose ends of tie downs 4 until
net is tight.
After driving a short-distance, check the
tension of the partition net, retighten if
necessary.
180
왘
Roll up partition net and secure it.
왘
Store partition net behind rear seat
bench.
The gross vehicle weight which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools,
spare wheel, installed accessories, passengers and luggage/cargo must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) for your vehicle. In addition, the
load must be distributed in such a way so
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for
the front and rear axle. The GVWR and
GAWR for your vehicle are indicated on the
certification label which can be found on
the left door pillar (컄 page 326).
Controls in detail
Loading
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded vehicle depend greatly on the load distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustrations shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
Warning!
Never ride vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
앫
For additional safety when transporting
cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into the opposite side buckles.
앫
Always pad off sharp edges.
i
G
The rear cargo compartment is the preferred place to carry objects. The enlarged cargo compartment (rear seats
folded) should only be used for items
which do not fit in the rear cargo compartment alone.
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the
weight and size of the load.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and can cause injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
앫
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, always use partition net when transporting cargo.
Always place items being carried
against front or rear seat backrests,
and fasten them as securely as possible.
앫
The heaviest portion of the cargo
should always be kept as low as possible against front or rear seat backrest
since it influences the handling characteristics of the vehicle.
181
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings
Warning!
G
While the partition net will help protect you
from smaller objects, it cannot prevent the
movement of large, heavier objects into the
passenger area in an accident.
Such items must be properly secured using
the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.
The cargo compartment is provided with
four tie-down anchors.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all rings with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
182
Controls in detail
Useful features
왔 Useful features
Interior storage spaces
Warning!
Warning!
G
To help avoid personal injury during a collision or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when stowing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
an accident and sudden maneuvers.
Opening the glove box
왘
Pull handle to open.
The glove box is illuminated with SmartKey
in starter switch position 1 or 2 when
opening the lid.
i
The glove box can be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.
Glove box
Closing the glove box
Luggage nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Warning!
G
왘
Push lid up to close.
G
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
could result in an accident.
1 Unlocked position
2 Locked position
3 Handle
183
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments below the armrest
Closing small compartment
왘
Lower armrest until it engages in lock.
i
Opening
Located in the cover of the storage
compartment is a storage area for
small items such as checks.
왘
Opening large compartment
왘
Opening small compartment
왘
Press button 1 and lift armrest.
Press button 2 and lift armrest.
Closing large compartment
왘
Lower armrest until it engages in lock.
i
In the large storage compartment there
is a storage area for up to three CDs.
184
Storage compartment in front of armrest
Slide cover 3 backward.
Closing
왘
Slide cover 3 forward.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holders
Warning!
Cup holder next to the armrest
Cup holder in front passenger footwell
G
When not in use, keep the cup holder
closed. Place only containers that fit into the
cup holder to prevent spills. Use lids on
open containers and do not fill containers to
a height where the contents, especially hot
liquids, could spill during vehicle maneuvers.
왘
Place cup holder bracket 1 into recess.
If the cup holder is no longer in use, it can
for example, be stored in the storage compartment below the armrest or in storage
pouch on the door panel.
왘
Swing bracket 1 upwards until it
clicks into place.
!
Fold the cup holder closed before moving the front passenger seat fully forward.
185
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in rear passenger footwell
Parcel net in front passenger footwell
A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is for
small and light items, such as road maps,
mail, etc.
Warning!
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
G
Do not place heavy or fragile objects, or objects having sharp edges in the parcel net.
!
Before folding the seat backrest forward and the rear seat bench down, be
sure that all containers in the rear cup
holder are removed.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, they could be thrown
around inside the vehicle and cause injury to
vehicle occupants.
!
When large objects are stored in the
parcel net, do not slide the seat fully
forward, it could damage them.
186
1 Ashtray
2 Cigarette lighter
3 Cover plate
Opening ashtray
왘
Briefly push the cover plate 3.
The ashtray opens automatically.
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘
Removing the ashtray insert
Warning!
G
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
still. Turn off the engine and set the parking
brake. Otherwise the vehicle might move as
a result of unintended contact with the gear
selector lever.
왘
Press sliding knob 4 to the right.
Opening ashtray
The insert will protrude a short-distance.
왘
Remove insert 5 in direction of arrow.
Removing the ashtray insert
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘
Press the insert into the frame until it
snaps into place.
Rear passenger compartment
4 Sliding knob
5 Astray insert
Pull at top of cover 1.
왘
Push down on catch 2.
왘
Pull out the ashtray insert 3.
Reinstalling the ashtray insert
왘
Position the insert and close the cover.
1 Cover
2 Catch
3 Ashtray insert
187
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cigarette lighter
Warning!
The lighter socket can be used to accommodate electrical accessories up to a
maximum of 180 W.
G
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
1 Cigarette lighter
왘
Electrical outlet
N
Electrical outlet
An electrical outlet is located in the rear
passenger footwell.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
왘
Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
(cigarette lighter type).
Briefly touch the cover plate.
The ashtray opens automatically.
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 1 or 2.
왘
Push in cigarette lighter 1.
The lighter will pop out automatically
when hot.
188
i
The electrical outlet can be used to accommodate electrical consumers (e.g.
air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Telephone*
Warning!
Warning!
G
Please do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
attention to the road must always be
his/her primary focus when driving. For
your safety and the safety of others, we recommend that you pull over to a safe location
and stop before placing or taking a telephone call.
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or a citizens band unit, should only
be used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
The external antenna must be approved by
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for information on the installation of an approved external antenna. Refer to the radio
transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
G
You can take and place telephone calls using the í and ì buttons on the
steering wheel. Use the control system for
performing other telephone functions
(컄 page 137).
See separate instruction manual for information on how to operate the telephone.
Warning!
G
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
driving, please use the hands-free device
and only use the telephone when road, traffic and weather conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving a vehicle. Whether or not prohibited by law, for
safety reasons, the driver should not use the
cellular telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data System)1 if road, traffic
and weather conditions permit.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before answering or placing a call.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approx. 44 feet (approximately 13.5 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements
189
Controls in detail
Useful features
Tele Aid
!
The initial activation of the Tele Aid system may only be performed by completing the subscriber agreement and
placing an acquaintance call using the
SOS button. Failure to complete either
of these steps will result in a system
that is not activated. If the system is
not activated, the indicator lamp in the
SOS button stays on after turning
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and the message TELE AID
EMERG. CALL – NOT ACTIVATED will be
shown in the multifunction display for
approx. 10 seconds.
If you have any questions regarding activation, please call the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
190
The Tele Aid system
i
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The SOS button is located above the interior rear view mirror.
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response:
The Roadside Assistance button •
and the Information button ¡ are
located below the center armrest cover.
앫
Automatic and manual emergency
앫
Roadside Assistance and
앫
Information
The Tele Aid system is operational providing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is available.
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
be adjusted when using the volume control
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
raise, press button æ and to lower,
press button ç.
왘
To activate, press the SOS button, the
Roadside Assistance button • or
the Information button ¡, depending on the type of response required.
Shortly after the completion of your acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password via first call mail. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid”
(USA only), you will have access to account
information, remote door unlock, profile
and more.
!
The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular
network for communication and the
GPS (Global Positioning System) satellites for vehicle location. If either of
these signals are unavailable, the
Tele Aid system may not function and if
this occurs, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
System self-check
Initially, after turning the SmartKey in
starter switch to position 2, malfunctions
are detected and indicated (the indicator
lamps in the SOS button, the Roadside Assistance button • and the Information
button ¡ stay on longer than
10 seconds or do not come on). The message TELE AID – DRIVE TO WORKSHOP! appears for approx. 10 seconds in the
multifunction display.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
the Roadside Assistance button and/or in
the Information button do not come on during the system self-check or if any of these
indicators remain illuminated constantly in
red and/or the message TELE AID DRIVE TO WORKSHOP is displayed in the
multifunction display after the system
self-check, a malfunction in the system has
been detected.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
above, the system may not operate as expected. Have the system checked at the
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Emergency calls
An emergency call is initiated automatically:
앫
following an accident in which the
emergency tensioning devices (ETDs)
or airbags deploy
앫
if the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away
alarm stays on for more than
20 seconds. See anti-theft alarm system (컄 page 82) and tow-away alarm
(컄 page 83)
An emergency call can also be initiated
manually by opening the cover next to the
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See below for instructions on
initiating an emergency call manually.
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
to flash. The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CONNECTING CALL appears in the multifunction display. When the connection is established, the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the
191
Controls in detail
Useful features
multifunction display. All information relevant to the emergency, such as the location of the vehicle (determined by the GPS
satellite location system), vehicle model,
identification number and color are generated.
A voice connection between the Response
Center and the occupants of the vehicle
will be established automatically soon after the emergency call has been initiated.
When a voice connection is established the
audio system mutes and the message
TELE AID – EMERGENCY CALL ACTIVE appears in the multifunction display. The Response Center will attempt to determine
more precisely the nature of the accident
provided they can speak to an occupant of
the vehicle.
192
The Tele Aid system is available if:
앫
앫
it has been activated and is operational. Activation requires a subscription
for monitoring services, connection
and cellular air time
the relevant cellular phone network
and GPS signals are available and pass
the information on to the response center
i
Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network
and pass the information on to the response center.
Warning!
G
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is illuminated continuously and there was no
voice connection to the Response Center
established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cellular phone network is not available).
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction
display for approx. 10 seconds.
Should this occur, assistance must be summoned by other means.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Initiating an emergency call manually
왘
Wait for a voice connection to the Response Center.
왘
Close the cover 1 after the emergency call is concluded.
Warning!
1 Cover
2 SOS button
왘
Briefly press on cover 1.
The cover opens.
왘
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
flashes until the emergency call is concluded.
G
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they receive an automatic SOS signal and cannot
make voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Roadside Assistance button •
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Roadside Assistance button •.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than two seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message TELE-DIAGNOSIS – CONNECTING CALL will appear in
the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message TELE-DIAGNOSIS –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will transmit data generating the vehicle
identification number, model, color and location (subject to availability of cellular
and GPS signals).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
of the vehicle will be established. When a
voice connection is established the audio
193
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄system mutes and the message TELE AID
– ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE CALL ACTIVE ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
왘
Describe the nature of the need for assistance.
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For
services such as labor and/or towing,
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside
Assistance manual for more information.
These programs are only available in the
USA:
앫
Sign and Drive services: Services such
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
the replacement of a flat tire with the
vehicle spare tire are obtainable
앫
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics: This function permits the Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance dispatcher to
download malfunction codes and actual vehicle data.
194
i
The indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance button • remains illuminated in red for approx. 10 seconds
during the system self-check after turning the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2 (together with the SOS
button and the Information
button ¡).
See system self-check (컄 page 191)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button • is illuminated
continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Response Center established, then the Tele Aid system
could not initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
phone network was not available). The
message TELE-DIAGNOSIS –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated using the ì button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
Information button ¡
Located below the center armrest cover is
the Information button ¡.
왘
Press and hold the button (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to the Customer Assistance Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message INFO – CONNECTING CALL will
appear in the multifunction display.
When the connection is established, the
message INFO – CALL CONNECTED appears
in the multifunction display. The Tele Aid
system will transmit data generating the
vehicle identification number, model, color
and location (subject to availability of cellular and GPS signals).
Controls in detail
Useful features
A voice connection between the Customer
Assistance Center representative and the
occupants of the vehicle will be established. When a voice connection is established the audio system mutes and the
message TELE AID – INFO CALL ACTIVE
appears in the multifunction display. Information regarding the operation of your vehicle, the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products and services is available to you.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and
use your ID and password (sent to you separately) to learn more (USA only).
i
The indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ remains illuminated in red
for approx. ten seconds during the system self-check after turning SmartKey
in the starter switch to position 2 (together with the SOS button and the
Roadside Assistance button •).
See system self-check (컄 page 191)
when the indicator lamp does not come
on in red or stays on longer than approximately ten seconds.
If the indicator lamp in the Information
button ¡ is illuminated continuously and there was no voice connection to
the Response Center established, then
the Tele Aid system could not initiate
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
cellular phone network is not available). The message INFO –
CALL FAILED appears in the multifunction display.
!
If the indicator lamps do not start flashing after pressing one of the buttons or
remains illuminated (in red) at any
time, the Tele Aid system has detected
a fault or the service is not currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center and have the system checked or
contact the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon
as possible.
Information calls can be terminated using the ì button on the multifunction steering wheel.
195
Controls in detail
Useful features
Upgrade Signals
!
i
The Tele Aid system processes calls using
the following priority.
If the indicator lamp continues to flash
or the system does not reset, contact
the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100 in
Canada.
When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
the COMAND system audio is muted
and the selected mode (radio or CD)
pauses. The optional cellular phone (if
installed) switches off. If you must use
this phone, the vehicle must be parked.
Disconnect the coiled cord and place
the call. The navigation system (if engaged) will continue to run. The display
in the instrument cluster is available for
use and spoken commands are only
available by pressing the RPT button on
the COMAND unit. A pop-up window
will appear in the COMAND display to
indicate that a Tele Aid call is in
progress.
앫
Automatic emergency – First priority
앫
Manual emergency – Second priority
앫
Roadside assistance – Third priority
앫
Information – Fourth priority
Should a higher priority call be initiated
while you are connected, an upgrade (alternating) tone will be heard and the appropriate indicator lamp will flash. If
certain information such as vehicle identification number or customer information is
not available, the operator may need to retransmit.
During this time you will hear a beep and
voice contact will be interrupted. Voice
contact will resume once the retransmission is completed. Once a call is concluded, a beep will be heard and the
appropriate indicator lamp will stop flashing. The COMAND system operation will
resume.
196
i
The indicator lamp in the respective
button flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only be terminated by a
Response Center or Customer Assistance Center representative, except
Roadside Assistance and Information
calls, which can also be terminated by
pressing button ì on the multifunction steering wheel.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Remote door unlock
In case you have locked your vehicle unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
and the reserve key is not handy:
왘
왘
The Response Center will then unlock your
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
feature.
i
Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
The remote door unlock feature is available if the relevant cellular phone network is available.
You will be asked to provide your password which you provided when you
completed the subscriber agreement.
The SOS button will flash and the message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED will appear in the multifunction display to indicate receipt of
the door unlock command.
Then return to your vehicle and press
the tailgate lock for minimum of
20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
The message EMERGENCY CALL –
CALL CONNECTED appears in the multifunction display.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle via Internet using the ID and password
sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center specialist will attempt
to establish voice contact with the vehicle occupants.
Stolen vehicle tracking services
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
왘
Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident report.
왘
Pass this number on to the
Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
with your password issued to you when
you subscribed to the service.
The Response Center will then attempt
to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is located, the Response Center will contact the local law enforcement and you.
The vehicle’s location will only be provided to law enforcement.
If the tailgate lock was pressed for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock authorization was received by the
Response Center, you must wait
15 minutes before pressing the tailgate
lock again.
197
Controls in detail
Useful features
Garage door opener
Warning!
The built-in remote control is capable of
operating up to three separately controlled
devices, for example garage door openers,
gate openers, or other devices compatible
with HomeLink® or some other systems.
Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent potential harm or damage.
You can program the signal transmitter
buttons.
Remote control integrated into the interior
rear view mirror
1
Indicator lamp
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button
198
G
5
Hand-held transmitter button
6
Hand-held remote control transmitter (not part of the vehicle
equipment)
When programming a garage door opener,
the door moves up or down. When programming a gate operator, the gate opens or
closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control
with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by
U.S. federal safety standards (this includes
any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage door
that cannot detect an object - signaling the
door to stop and reverse - does not meet
current U.S. federal safety standards.
Controls in detail
Useful features
i
i
Certain types of garage door openers
are incompatible with the integrated
opener. If you should experience difficulties with programming the transmitter, contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, or
call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer
Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
For operation in the USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
Programming or reprogramming the integrated remote control
Step 1:
왘
Switch on ignition.
Step 2:
왘
If you have previously programmed an
integrated signal transmitter button
and wish to retain its programming,
proceed to step 3. Otherwise, press
and hold the two outer signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4 and release
them only when the indicator light begins to flash after approximately 20
seconds (do not hold the button for
longer than 30 seconds). This procedure erases any previous settings for
all three channels and initializes the
memory. If you later wish to program a
second and/or third hand-held transmitter to the remaining two signal
transmitter buttons, do not repeat this
step and begin directly with step 3. 컄컄
199
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄Step
왘
3:
Hold the end of the hand-held remote
control transmitter 6 of the device
you wish to train approximately 2 to
5 in (5 to12 cm) away from the surface
of the integrated remote control located on the interior rear view mirror,
keeping the indicator lamp 1 in view.
Step 4:
왘
Using both hands, simultaneously
press the hand-held transmitter
button 5 and the desired integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4). Do not release the buttons until
completing step 5.
The indicator lamp 1 on the integrated remote control will flash, first slowly
and then rapidly.
i
i
The indicator lamp 1 flashes the first
time the signal transmitter button is
programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp
will only start flashing after 20 seconds.
If the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly
for about two seconds and then turns
to a constant light, continue with programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped
with the “rolling code” feature.
Step 5:
왘
When the indicator lamp 1 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons.
Step 7:
왘
Step 6:
왘
Press and hold the just-trained integrated signal transmitter button and
observe the indicator lamp 1.
If the indicator lamp 1 stays on constantly, programming is complete and
your device should activate when the
integrated signal transmitter button is
pressed and released.
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code devices) with the rolling code feature, follow these instructions after
completing the “Programming” portion
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second
person may make the following training
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 8:
왘
200
Locate “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Exact location and color of the button
may vary by garage door opener brand.
Depending on manufacturer, the “training” button may also be referred to as
“learn”or “smart” button. If there is difficulty locating the transmitting button,
refer to the garage door opener operator’s manual.
Some garage door openers (or other rolling
code equipped devices) may require you to
perform this procedure a third time to
complete the training.
Step 12:
왘
Step 9:
왘
Press “training” button on the garage
door opener motor head unit.
The “training light” is activated.
You have 30 seconds to initiate the following step.
Step 10:
왘
Firmly press, hold for two seconds and
release the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4).
Step 11:
왘
Press, hold for two seconds and release same button a second time to
complete the training process.
Confirm the garage door operation by
pressing the programmed integrated
signal transmitter button (2, 3
or 4).
If you live in Canada or if you are having difficulties programming a gate operator (regardless of where you live) by using the
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
Step 4:
왘
Continue to press and hold the integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) while you press and re-press
(“cycle”) your hand-held remote control transmitter 6 every two seconds
until the frequency signal has beelearned. Upon successful training, the
indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
then rapidly after several seconds.
왘
Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
Step 13:
왘
To program the remaining two buttons,
repeat the steps above starting with
step 3.
Gate operator/Canadian programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
which may not be long enough for the integrated signal transmitter to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
201
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Select and press the appropriate integrated signal transmitter button (2,
3 or 4) to activate the remote controlled device.
The integrated remote control transmitter continues to send the signal as
long as the button is pressed – up to
20 seconds.
Erasing the integrated remote control
memory
Reprogramming a single integrated signal transmitter button
왘
Switch on ignition.
왘
Simultaneously hold down the signal
transmitter buttons 2 and 4, for approximately 20 seconds, until the indicator lamp 1 blinks rapidly. Do not
hold for longer than 30 seconds.
To program a device using a signal transmitter button previously trained, follow
these steps:
The codes of all three channels are
erased.
i
If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes
of all three channels.
202
왘
Press and hold the desired signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release the button.
왘
The indicator lamp will begin to flash after 20 seconds. Without releasing the
integrated signal transmitter button,
proceed with programming starting
with step 3.
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel
The steering wheel heater warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel.
The stalk with the heated steering wheel
switch is on the lower left-hand side of the
steering wheel.
Switching on
왘
Switch on the ignition.
All lamps in the instrument cluster
come on.
왘
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direction of arrow 1.
The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 3 comes on.
Switching off
왘
Turn switch at the tip of stalk in direction of arrow 2.
The steering wheel heater is turned off.
Indicator lamp 3 goes out.
1 Switching on
2 Switching off
3 Indicator lamp
i
The steering wheel heater does not
turn off automatically.
203
204
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Battery
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
205
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
왔 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find detailed information on operating, maintaining and caring for your vehicle.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied you will be with its performance later
on.
앫
Drive your vehicle during the first
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫
During this period, avoid heavy loads
(full throttle driving) and excessive engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm in each gear).
앫
Avoid accelerating by kick-down.
앫
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever.
앫
Select positions 3, 2 or 1 only when
driving at moderate speeds (for hill
driving).
After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum.
206
!
Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
앫
During the first 1000 miles
(1500 km), do not exceed a speed
of 85 mph (140 km/h).
앫
During this period, avoid engine
speeds above 4500 rpm in each
gear.
All of the above instructions, as may apply
to your vehicle type, also apply when driving the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after the
engine, the transfer case, the front differential or the rear differential has been replaced.
i
Always obey applicable speed limits.
Operation
Driving instructions
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, depends on driving habits and operating conditions.
To save fuel you should:
앫
Keep tires at the recommended inflation pressures.
앫
Remove unnecessary loads.
앫
Allow engine to warm up under low
load use.
앫
Avoid frequent acceleration and deceleration.
앫
Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Service
Booklet and as required by the FSS.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Drinking and driving
Warning!
Pedals
G
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs
and driving are very dangerous combinations. Even a small amount of alcohol or
drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions
and judgement.
Warning!
G
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times. Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
movement.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal accident are greatly increased when you drink
or take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
taking drugs.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly country.
207
Operation
Driving instructions
Power assistance
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
Brakes
Warning!
G
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water deep enough to wet brake components
or salty road conditions, the first braking action may be somewhat reduced and increased pedal pressure may be necessary to
obtain expected braking effect. Maintain a
safe distance from vehicles in front.
208
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an accident.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
vehicle with considerable force prior to
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes.
If your brake system is normally only subjected to moderate loads, you should occasionally test the effectiveness of the
brakes by applying above-normal braking
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
!
Be very careful not to endanger other
road users when you apply the brakes.
Refer to the description of the Brake
Assist System (BAS) (컄 page 76).
If the parking brake is released and the
brake warning lamp in the instrument cluster stays on and there is no audible warning (EBB), the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is too low.
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
be the reason for low brake fluid in the reservoir.
Have the brake system inspected immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
All checks and service work on the brake
system should be carried out by by qualified technicians only. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Install only brake pads and brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
If other than recommended brake pads are
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
safe braking is substantially impaired. This
could result in an accident.
!
When driving down long and steep
grades, relieve the load on the brakes
by selecting gear range 3, 2 or 1 on the
automatic transmission to use the engine’s braking power (컄 page 142).
This helps prevent overheating of the
brakes and reduces brake pad wear.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
parking, so the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
Parking
Warning!
G
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
exhaust system, as these materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
place full load on the engine until the operating temperature has been reached.
To reduce the risk of personal injury as a result of vehicle movement, before turning off
the engine and leaving the vehicle always:
When starting off on a slippery surface, do
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended period with the ESP switched off.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
앫
Pull the parking brake lever up as many
notches as possible.
앫
Move the selector lever to position P.
앫
Slowly release brake pedal.
앫
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheel towards the road curb.
앫
Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove.
앫
Take the SmartKey and lock vehicle
when leaving.
Driving off
To ensure sufficient traction during
off-road driving, activate differential locks
as needed (컄 page 150).
209
Operation
Driving instructions
!
Set the parking brake whenever parking or leaving the vehicle. In addition,
move gear selector lever to position P.
In addition, when parking on hills, always set the parking brake and turn
front wheel towards the road curb.
Tires
Warning!
G
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
210
Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required by
law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and become visible at a tread depth of approximately 1⁄16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be replaced.
Specified tire pressures must be maintained. This applies particularly if the tires
are subject to high loads (e.g. high speeds,
heavy loads, high ambient temperatures).
The tread wear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread.
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Warning!
G
Although the applicable federal motor vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be worn
when the tread wear indicators (TWI) become visible at approximately 1⁄16 in
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not allow your tires to wear down to that level. As
tread depth approaches 1⁄8 in (3.0 mm), the
adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
widely.
Warning!
G
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur even
at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
rain.
Operation
Driving instructions
Tire traction
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperatures are close to the freezing
point.
Warning!
G
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
with extreme caution.
Mercedes-Benz recommends M+S rated
radial-ply tires with a minimum tread depth
of approximately 1⁄6 in (4 mm) for the winter season for all four wheels to ensure
normal balanced handling characteristics.
On packed snow, they can reduce your
stopping distance as compared with summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still considerably greater than when the road is not
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appropriate caution.
!
Avoid spinning of one drive wheel. This
may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Tire speed rating
Despite of the tire speed rating, local
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent driving speeds appropriate to prevailing conditions.
Warning!
G
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum speed rating of the tires.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
tires are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, causing loss of vehicle control and possibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
injury and possible death, for you and for
others.
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
“V”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 149 mph (240 km/h).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
i
For information on tire speed rating for
winter tires, see “Winter tires”
(컄 page 240).
211
Operation
Driving instructions
Winter driving instructions
The most important rule for slippery or icy
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
move gear selector lever to position N. Try
to keep the vehicle under control by corrective steering action.
i
For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains”
(컄 page 241).
Warning!
G
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
in order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of control loss.
212
Do not engage the transfer case in position
LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At
speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle
steering is adversely affected by the LOW
RANGE – ABS (컄 page 75).
Road salts and chemicals can adversely affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce
the normal brake effect.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
efficiency back to normal.
If the vehicle is parked after being driven
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency should be tested as soon as possible after driving is resumed.
Warning!
G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking maneuvers.
Warning!
G
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in unconsciousness and death.
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation,
open a window slightly on the side of the vehicle not facing the wind.
Warning!
G
The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. Indicated temperatures just above the freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 240).
Operation
Driving instructions
Standing water
!
Do not drive through flooded areas or
water of unknown depth. Before driving
through water, determine its depth.
Never accelerate before driving into
water. The bow wave could force water
into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging them.
If you must drive through standing water, drive slowly to prevent water from
entering the passenger compartment
or the engine compartment. Water in
these areas could cause damage to
electrical components or wiring of the
engine or transmission, or could result
in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake, causing severe
internal engine damage. Any such damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Passenger compartment
Warning!
G
Always fasten items being carried as securely as possible.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury
to vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. Always use partition
net when transporting cargo. Partition net
cannot secure hard or heavy objects. Always fasten items being carried as securely
as possible using the cargo tie-down rings in
the cargo compartment floor and fastening
material.
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
could result in an accident. This vehicle is
not intended to carry items on its roof. Thus
roof rails and roof mounted ski or bike holders must not be used.
Off-road driving
Warning!
G
Do not load items on the roof. It may cause
instability during some maneuvers which
could result in an accident.
213
Operation
Driving instructions
Warning!
G
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb,
back it down in reverse gear.
Do not drive along the side of a slope (danger of vehicle rollover). If in doing so the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,
immediately steer into a line of gravity
(straight up or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you
use only the service brake.
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
friction property can cause exceptional wear
and tear as well as brake failure.
Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up
and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that
full braking power may not be available in an
emergency.
Read this chapter carefully before you begin off-road travel.
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle characteristics and gear changing before you
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving. We recommend that you start out with
easy off-road travel.
Special driving features for off-road
driving
The following driving features are available
for specific kind of operation:
앫
ABS (컄 page 74)
앫
ESP (컄 page 78)
앫
4-ETS (컄 page 77)
앫
Differential lock (컄 page 148)
앫
Transfer case (컄 page 145)
Off-road driving rules
왘
Engage the transfer case in position
LOW before driving under off-road conditions (컄 page 145).
왘
If necessary activate differential locks
(컄 page 150).
The ABS, BAS and ESP are switched off
automatically when the differential
locks are activated.
왘
214
Fasten items being carried as securely
as possible (컄 page 180).
Operation
Driving instructions
i
앫
Whenever driving in off-road mode, we
recommend:
Avoid excessive engine
speeds – drive at moderate engine
speeds (max. 3000 rpm).
Checklist before off-road driving
앫
앫
Keeping doors, tailgate, windows
and sliding/pop-up roof closed.
앫
Before driving through water, determine its depth.
앫
Switching cruise control off.
앫
Do not stop vehicle while immersed
in water, and do not shut off the engine.
!
Observe the following during off-road
driving:
앫
Adjust vehicle speed to condition of
terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
steeper the terrain, the lower the
speed should be. Drive through water slowly at an even speed, avoiding a bow wave.
앫
Be especially careful when driving
in unknown territory. It may be necessary to get out of the vehicle and
scout the path you intend to take.
앫
Watch out for obstacles, such as
rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.
앫
앫
Engine oil level
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 229). The display ENGINE OIL
LEVEL - OK must appear in the multifunction display.
Only then can the vehicle obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on steep gradients.
In sandy soil, drive at a steady
speed as allowed by conditions.
This helps overcome the vehicle
rolling resistance and reduces the
likelihood of the vehicle sinking into
the ground.
Tires
앫
Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It interrupts the forward momentum of the vehicle.
Check the tread depth and maintain
specified tire pressure (see tire pressure label inside the fuel filler flap).
앫
Check tires for possible damage and
remove foreign objects.
앫
Replace missing valve caps.
앫
Always drive on slopes with the engine running and the vehicle in
gear.
앫
Inspect the vehicle for possible
damage after each off-road trip.
215
Operation
Driving instructions
Rims
앫
Driving in steep terrain
Dented or bent rims can cause tire
pressure loss and damage the tire
beads. For this reason, check and, if
necessary, change rims before driving
off-road.
Vehicle tool kit
앫
Check if the vehicle jack is functional.
앫
In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small
plank (to put under the vehicle jack on
sandy soil) with you.
Drive slowly.
앫
Utilize the engine’s braking power
when descending a slope, observe the
engine speed (do not overrev the engine). Apply the service brake as needed.
앫
Check the brakes after a lengthy downgrade drive.
Traction in steep terrain
Slope angle
1 27°
2 36°
앫
216
앫
Comply with the warnings
(컄 page 214) and rules for off-road
driving (컄 page 214).
앫
Driving on embankments, slopes and
other steep inclines should only be
done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the
line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a 80% grade.
앫
Select gear range 2 or 1 on the automatic transmission (컄 page 142).
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
continuous wheel traction when driving in
steep terrain.
i
The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting
out on a steep incline when the front
wheels have then the tendency to slip
due to the weight shifting away the
front axle.The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and limits the torque for the
front wheels by braking them. Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels
is provided.
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving across a hilltop
Driving downhill
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not
select gear range N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up too much after climbing a hill.
앫
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (컄 page 142).
앫
Drive downhill observing the same
rules as driving uphill (컄 page 216).
Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive
across the hilltop.
!
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner
prevents the vehicle from:
Only apply the service brake if the vehicle is traveling straight downhill, i.e. in
the line of gravity.
앫
jumping across the hilltop
앫
loosing its forward momentum
i
앫
speeding up too much after climbing
the hill
The special LOW RANGE – ABS setting
allows for precise and brief (cyclical)
blocking of the front wheels, permitting
them to dig into loose ground.
Remember that, when stopped, the
front wheels slide across a surface and
thus lose their ability to steer the vehicle.
Driving through water
1 19 in (48 cm)
앫
Before driving through water, determine its depth.
It should not be deeper than approximately 19 in (48 cm).
Make sure you check the water bed.
The ground surface may not be firm
which may result in deeper waters than
expected when driving the vehicle
through it.
217
Operation
Driving instructions
앫
Comply with the warnings
(컄 page 214) and rules for off-road
driving (컄 page 214).
앫
Switch off the exterior lamps as well as
the climate control.
앫
Select gear range 2 or 1 on the automatic transmission (컄 page 142).
앫
Enter the water only at a shallow spot,
driving at walking speed.
!
Never accelerate before driving into
the water. The bow wave could force
water into the engine and auxiliary
equipment, thus damaging them.
앫
Do not stop vehicle while immersed in
water, and do not shut off the engine.
There is a very high level of driving resistance in water. The surface is slippery and may not be firm, making
pulling away in water difficult and dangerous.
218
앫
앫
Clean mud off the tire tread after driving through water.
To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
brake pedal several times after leaving
the water.
Crossing obstacles
!
If possible, use the assistance of a second person outside the vehicle to scout
the path you intend to take and check
for adequate ground clearance when
you cross obstacles with your vehicle.
The person assisting you outside the
vehicle should always be a safe distance away from the vehicle and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt
in case of any unexpected vehicle
movement.
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, inspect vehicle for any damage,
especially vehicle undercarriage and
suspension components. Failure to do
so can adversely affect the vehicle’s future performance, including increased
chance of an accident.
Operation
Driving instructions
앫
Check the vehicle clearance before
crossing obstacles.
앫
Comply with the warnings
(컄 page 214) and rules for off-road
driving (컄 page 214).
앫
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (컄 page 142).
앫
Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or
big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of
the front wheels at the center of the obstacle, and repeat same with the rear
wheel.
!
Special attention is needed when you
cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a
result of its possible slanted position
which in turn may result in the vehicle
tipping or rolling over.
Ruts
!
A number of off-road tracks or other byroads have deep ruts. If the vehicle
does not have enough ground clearance:
앫
it could be damaged
앫
the underside of the vehicle may
come down on a surface and remain stuck
앫
Check the vehicle clearance before
driving in ruts.
앫
Comply with the warnings
(컄 page 214) and rules for off-road
driving (컄 page 214).
앫
Select gear range 1 on the automatic
transmission (컄 page 142).
앫
Drive slowly next to the ruts rather than
through them if at all possible.
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, inspect vehicle for any damage,
especially vehicle undercarriage and
suspension components. Failure to do
so can adversely affect the vehicle’s future performance, including increased
chance of an accident.
219
Operation
Driving instructions
Returning from off-road driving
Warning!
Off-road driving increases strain on the vehicle.
G
Never drive on pavement with activated differential locks. Engaged front axle differential locks limits ability to move around
curves.
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible damage to your vehicle has occurred,
you should turn on the hazard warning flashers, carefully slow down, and drive with caution to an area which is a safe distance from
the roadway.
Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for
possible damage. If the vehicle or tires appear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
dealer for repairs.
Damage to the vehicle negatively influences
driving comfort and poses the risk of accident to you and other drivers.
220
앫
We recommend that you inspect the vehicle for possible damage after each off-road
trip. Recognizing any damage and a subsequent timely repair reduces the chance of
a possible breakdown or accident later on.
Proceed as follows:
앫
Switch the transfer case in position
HIGH (컄 page 145).
앫
Disengage differential locks
(컄 page 151).
Remove excessive dirt from tires,
wheels, wheel housings, and underbody.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean
the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,
and wheels from extreme dirt using a
strong jet of water.
앫
Inspect frame, oil pan, brake hoses,
etc., as well as vehicle underbody for
possible damage.
앫
Check tires for possible damage and
remove foreign objects. Clean all exterior lamps and conduct a brake test.
Operation
Driving instructions
앫
Clean all exterior lamps and check
them for possible damage.
Control and operation of radio transmitters
앫
Check for brush or branches caught in
the undercarriage.
COMAND, radio and telephone*
Warning!
They could increase the possibility of a
fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake
lines, puncture rubber bellows of the
axles or drive shafts.
앫
앫
Telephones and two-way radios
Warning!
G
Do not forget that your primary responsibility is to drive the vehicle safely. Only operate
the COMAND, radio or telephone1 if road,
traffic and weather conditions permit.
After continued operation in mud,
sand, water or other dirty conditions,
clean the brake discs, wheels, brake
pads and check and clean axle joints.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of approximately
50 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Conduct a brake test.
1
Observe all legal requirements.
G
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. without being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunction of the vehicle’s electronic system, possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury.
Radio transmitters, such as a portable telephone or citizens band unit should only be
used inside the vehicle if they are connected to an antenna that is installed on the
outside of the vehicle.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation instructions regarding use of an external antenna.
221
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving abroad
Catalytic converter
Abroad, there is a widely-spread
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
which are not listed in the index of your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center directory, you should request pertinent information from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an
important element in conjunction with the
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial control of the pollutants in the exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper
operating condition by following our recommended maintenance instructions as
outlined in your Service Booklet.
Warning!
!
To prevent damage to the catalytic converters, use only premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel
may reach the catalytic converter,
causing it to overheat and start a fire.
222
G
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or operate this vehicle in areas where combustible materials such as grass, hay or leaves
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire.
Emission control
Certain engine systems serve to keep the
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible legal limits.
These systems, of course, will function
properly only when maintained strictly according to factory specifications. Any adjustments on the engine should, therefore,
be carried out only by qualified
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center authorized technicians. Engine adjustments
should not be altered in any way. Moreover, the specified service jobs must be
Operation
Driving instructions
carried out regularly according to
Mercedes-Benz servicing requirements.
For details refer to the Service Booklet.
Warning!
G
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness and lead to death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected
immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one window fully open at all times.
Coolant temperature
Warning!
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise to approx. 248°F
(120°C).
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious engine damage which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i
Excessive coolant temperatures trigger
a warning message in the multifunction
display (컄 page 269).
G
앫
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
앫
Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns and can occur just
by opening the hood. Stay away from
the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
223
Operation
At the gas station
왔 At the gas station
Refueling
Warning!
Warning!
G
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
It burns violently and can cause serious injury. Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish
all smoking materials. Never allow sparks,
flame or smoking materials near gasoline!
Failure to remove the fuel cap slowly could
result in personal injury.
The fuel filler flap is located on the
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with
the remote control automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
224
G
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pressure in the system which could cause a gas
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray
back out when removing the fuel pump nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
왘
왘
Turn off the engine.
Replace the fuel cap by turning it to the
right.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
You should hear the fuel filler cap engage.
왘
Open the fuel filler flap by pushing at
the point indicated by the arrow.
왘
Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
to it until possible pressure is released.
왘
Take off the cap and set it in the recess
on the fuel filler flap.
왘
To prevent fuel vapors from escaping
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle
unit.
왘
Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or overfill.
왘
Close the fuel filler flap.
!
The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
damage the vehicle paint finish.
When refueling the vehicle, make certain that no gasoline comes into contact with plastic tail lamp to prevent
damaging the lens.
Operation
At the gas station
i
Check regularly and before a long trip
Use only premium unleaded gasoline
with a minimum Posted Octane Rating
of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump.
!
More information on gasoline can be
found in the Factory Approved Service
Products pamphlet.
i
Leaving the engine running and the fuel
cap open can cause the ? malfunction indicator lamp to illuminate.
See also “Practical hints” section
(컄 page 256).
Brake fluid
1 Coolant
2 Brake fluid
i
Opening the hood, see (컄 page 227).
Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (potable water quality). For more information,
see “Coolant level” (컄 page 232) and see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.”
(컄 page 333).
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center immediately. Do not add
brake fluid as this will not solve the
problem. For more information, see
“Practical hints” (컄 page 254) .
Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system
For more information on refilling the reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window washer
system and headlamp cleaning system”
(컄 page 234).
225
Operation
At the gas station
Engine oil level
For more information on engine oil, see
(컄 page 228).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For information on replacing light bulbs, see “Replacing bulbs” (컄 page 295).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 104).
Tire inflation pressure
For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄 page 237).
226
Operation
Engine compartment
왔 Engine compartment
왘
Hood
Pull release lever 1 upward.
The hood is unlocked.
Warning!
G
!
To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or hood, open the hood only with
wipers in parked position.
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could
be forced open by passing air flow.
Opening
The pull release lever is under the driver’s
side of the instrument panel.
Warning!
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. Make sure the hood is
properly closed before driving. When closing
the hood, use extreme caution not to catch
hands or fingers.
The radiator fan may continue to run for approximately 30 seconds or even restart after the engine has been turned off. Stay
clear of fan blades.
Warning!
2 Safety hook
1 Release lever
왘
Lift hood up slightly.
왘
Pull safety hook 2 in direction of arrow and open hood.
G
G
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the engine is
overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled down. If necessary, call the fire department.
227
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage,
it is dangerous to touch any components (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
앫
with the engine running
앫
while starting the engine
앫
if ignition is “on” and the engine is
turned manually
Closing
Warning!
Engine oil
G
Be careful that you do not close the hood on
anyone.
왘
Lower hood and let it drop into lock
from a height of approximately 0.7 ft
(20 cm).
The hood will lock audibly.
왘
Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
!
Do not push the hood closed manually,
as this could damage it.
228
The amount of oil your engine needs will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Higher oil consumption can
occur when
앫
the vehicle is new
앫
the vehicle is driven frequently at
higher engine speeds
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
i
Do not use any special lubricant additives, as these may damage the drive
assemblies. Using special additives not
approved by Mercedes-Benz will
restrict your warranty entitlement.
More information on this subject is
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Operation
Engine compartment
Checking engine oil level with the
control system
i
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
MEASURING NOW
If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j
button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
앫
be parked on level ground
앫
be at normal operating temperature
앫
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
To check the engine oil level via the
multifunction display, do the following:
왘
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 2.
왘
One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the indicator:
앫
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
OK
앫
ADD 1.0 Qt. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
The standard display (컄 page 115) should
appear in the multifunction display.
왘
Press button k or j on the
steering wheel until the following
message is seen in the multifunction
display:
MEASURE. CORRECT
ONLY IF VEH. LEVEL
After about three seconds this
message is displayed:
(Canada: 1.0 LITER)
앫
ADD 1.5 Qts. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
(Canada: 1.5 LITERS)
앫
If necessary, add engine oil.
For adding engine oil see (컄 page 231).
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 333) and
(컄 page 334).
Other display messages
If the SmartKey is not turned to position 2
in the starter switch, the following
message will appear:
FOR ENGINE OIL LEVEL
SWITCH ON IGNITION!
왘
Switch on the ignition.
ADD 2.0 Qts. TO
REACH MAX. OIL LEVEL!
If you see the message:
(Canada: 2.0 LITERS)
OBSERVE WAITING PERIOD
229
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
If engine is at normal operating
temperature, wait five minutes before
repeating check procedure.
왘
If engine is not yet at normal operating
temperature, wait 30 minutes before
repeating check procedure.
If you see the message:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
NOT WHEN ENGINE ON!
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
If the engine is at normal operating
temperature, wait five minutes before
checking oil.
왘
If the engine is not yet at normal
operating temperature, you must wait
30 minutes before checking oil.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
following message will appear:
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL
230
왘
Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
!
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i
Perform the engine oil level check with
the dipstick if it cannot be completed
with the control system (컄 page 230).
In this case we recommend that you
have the system checked at a
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
For more information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 271).
Checking engine oil level with the oil
dipstick
When checking the oil level the vehicle
must
앫
be parked on level ground
앫
be at normal operating temperature
앫
have been stationary for at least five
minutes with the engine turned off
i
The engine oil level can be checked by
either the oil dipstick or via the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (컄 page 229). The amount of
engine oil needed is shown more
precisely in the multifunction display.
Operation
Engine compartment
i
To check the engine oil level with the oil
dipstick, do the following:
The filling quantity between the upper
and lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
왘
Open the hood (컄 page 227).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 (컄 page 232)
왘
Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
왘
왘
Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
dipstick guide tube.
For adding engine oil see (컄 page 231).
왘
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
approximately three seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
Oil dipstick
If necessary, add engine oil.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 333) and
(컄 page 334).
For more information on messages in the
display concerning engine oil, see the
“Practical hints” section (컄 page 271).
Adding engine oil
!
Only use approved engine oils. For a
listing of approved engine oils, refer to
the Factory Approved Service Products
pamphlet in your vehicle literature portfolio.
In addition, check the oil filler cap for
important information pertaining to the
engine oil needing to meet a specific
Mercedes-Benz specification (e.g. MB
229.5). If such information is printed
on the oil filler cap, only use an engine
oil from the list of approved engine oils
in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet that meets the specification indicated on the oil filler cap.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The oil level is correct when it is between
the lower (min) and upper (max) mark of
the oil dipstick.
231
Operation
Engine compartment
왘
1 Oil dipstick
2 Oil filler cap
왘
Unscrew oil filler cap 2 from filler
neck.
왘
Add engine oil as required. Be careful
not to overfill with oil.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
entering the ground or water.
232
!
Transmission fluid level
Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
off. It could cause damage to the
engine and catalytic converter not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
The transmission fluid level does not need
to be checked. The transmission has a permanent supply of automatic transmission
fluid.
Screw oil filler cap 2 back on filler
neck.
If you notice transmission fluid loss or gear
shifting malfunctions, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center check
the automatic transmission.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 333) and
(컄 page 334).
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level,
앫
the vehicle must be parked on level
ground.
앫
the engine must be cool. The coolant
level should reach the COLD LEVEL
mark in the reservoir.
Operation
Engine compartment
Warning!
G
The coolant expansion tank is located on
the passenger side of the engine compartment.
In order to avoid any possibly serious burns:
앫
앫
앫
앫
Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature display indicates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if engine temperature is above
194°F (90°C). Allow engine to cool
down before removing cap. The coolant
reservoir contains hot fluid and is under
pressure.
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approximately 1⁄2 turn to relieve excess pressure. If opened immediately, scalding
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under pressure.
왘
Using a rag, turn the cap slowly approximately one half turn to the left to release any excess pressure.
왘
Continue turning the cap to the left and
remove it.
왘
Check coolant level.
The coolant level is correct if the level
1 Cap
앫
for cold coolant: is level with the
mark on the reservoir
앫
for warm coolant: is approx. 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
왘
Add coolant as required.
왘
Replace and tighten cap until you hear
it click a few times.
For more information on coolant, see
“Coolants” (컄 page 336).
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn if it comes into contact with hot engine parts.
233
Operation
Engine compartment
Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment on the passenger side. It holds approximately 5.3 US qt
(5.0 l). The headlamp cleaning system is
also supplied from the windshield washer
reservoir.
왘
Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.
왘
Check washer solvent level and add
washer solvent as required.
왘
Press cap 1 on the filler neck until is
has completely engaged.
Add MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” to the water during all seasons.
앫
앫
1 Cap
234
At temperatures above freezing point,
use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” to prevent smearing.
If there is a danger of frost, use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
“S” and commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze to prevent water from freezing
on the windshield and the reservoir
from being damaged.
Premix the windshield washer fluid in a
suitable container, adapting the mixing ratio to the outside temperature
(컄 page 339).
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer
solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may ignite and burn. You could be
seriously burned.
!
Only use washer fluid which is suitable
for plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
Operation
Battery
왔 Battery
The battery is located in front of the rear
seat bench and below the cup holder. Jump
starting terminals are located in the left
side of the engine compartment
(컄 page 314). Refer to Service Booklet for
battery maintenance intervals.
The battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service life.
If you use your vehicle less than approximately 200 miles (300 km) per month,
mostly for short-distance trips, or if it is not
used for long periods of time, you will need
to have the battery charge checked more
frequently and corrected if necessary.
When replacing batteries, always use batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center about steps you need to observe.
G
Observe all safety instructions
and precautions when handling
automotive batteries.
A Risk of explosion
flames or sparks away
D Keep
from battery. Do not smoke.
B
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
allow it to come into contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with clear
water and seek medical help if
necessary.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
i
If the battery is discharged
앫
you will no longer be able to turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch
앫
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
For more information, see “Battery”
(컄 page 311).
E Wear eye protection.
C Keep children away.
the instructions in this
F Follow
Operator’s Manual.
235
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for information on tested and
recommended rims and tires for summer
and winter operation. They can also offer
advice concerning tire service and purchase.
Warning!
Warning!
Do not mix different tire construction types
(i.e. radial, bias, bias-belted) on your vehicle
because handling may be adversely affected
and may result in loss of control.
G
Replace rims or tires with the same designation, manufacturer and type as shown on the
original part. See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for further information. If incorrectly sized rims
and tires are mounted:
앫
The wheel brakes or suspension components can be damaged.
앫
The correct operating clearance of the
wheels and the tires are no longer guaranteed.
G
Warning!
앫
Use only sets of tires and rims of the
same type and make.
앫
Tires must be of the correct size for the
rim.
앫
Break in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
speeds.
앫
Regularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can
cause tire pressure loss and damage to
the tire beads.
앫
If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
pressure and correct as required.
앫
Do not allow your tires to wear down
too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1⁄8 in (3 mm).
앫
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
G
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them.
When replacing rims, use only genuine
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous
damage cannot always be recognized on
retreads. Mercedes-Benz can therefore
not assure the operating safety of the vehicle when such tires are used.
236
Important guidelines
Operation
Tires and wheels
Life of tire
Direction of rotation
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including but not limited to:
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages, such as better hydroplaning performance. To benefit, however, you must
ensure the tires rotate in the direction
specified.
앫
Driving style
앫
Tire pressure
앫
Distance driven
Warning!
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the intended direction of rotation of the tire.
G
Tires and spare wheel should be replaced after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread.
!
Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as
possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease and gasoline.
Checking tire inflation pressure
Warning!
G
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly:
앫
Check the tires for punctures from foreign objects.
앫
Check to see whether air is leaking from
the valves or from around the rim.
Correct the tire pressure only when tires
are cold.
Regularly check your tire pressure at intervals of no more than 14 days.
If the tires are warm, you should only correct the tire pressure if it is too low for current operating conditions.
A table on the fuel filler flap lists the specified tire inflation pressures for warm and
cold tires as well as for various operating
conditions.
237
Operation
Tires and wheels
i
The pressures listed for light loads are
minimum values offering high driving
comfort.
Increased inflation pressures listed for
heavier loads may also be used for light
loads. These higher pressures produce
favorable handling characteristics. The
ride of the vehicle, however, will be
somewhat harder. Never exceed the
max. values or inflate tires below the
min. values listed in the fuel filler flap.
Tire pressure changes by approximately
1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of air
temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure where the
temperature is different from the outside
temperature.
Tire temperature and tire pressure are also
increased while driving, depending on the
driving speed and the tire load.
238
Warning!
G
Follow recommended inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
etc.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail
from being overheated.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) as indicated on the certification label on the driver’s door pillar. Overloading the tires can
overheat them, possibly causing a blowout.
Check the spare tire periodically for condition and inflation. Spare tire will age and
become worn over time even if never used,
and thus should be inspected and replaced
when necessary.
Rotating wheels
Warning!
G
Rotate front and rear wheels only if there are
of the same size.
The wheels can be rotated every 3000 to
6000 miles (5000 to 10000 km) or sooner if necessary, according to the degree of
tire wear. The same direction of tire rotation must be retained.
Rotate the wheels before the characteristic tire wear pattern becomes visible
(shoulder wear on front wheels and tread
center wear on rear wheels).
Thoroughly clean the inner side of the
wheels after each rotation. Check and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
Operation
Tires and wheels
Warning!
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
loose if not tightened with a torque of
97 lb-ft (130 Nm).
Use only genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
239
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This
service includes:
앫
Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
concentration.
앫
Addition of cleaning concentrate to the
water of the windshield and headlamp
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate
“S” to a premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze which is formulated
for below freezing point temperatures
(컄 page 339).
앫
앫
Battery test. Battery capacity drops
with decreasing ambient temperature.
A well charged battery helps to ensure
the engine can be started even at low
ambient temperatures.
Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recommend M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
⁄6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
240
Winter tires
Always use winter tires at temperatures
below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry
road conditions prevail. Use of winter tires
is the only way to achieve the maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP, EBB and
4-ETS in winter operation.
For safe handling, make sure all winter
tires mounted are of the same make and
have the same tread design.
Warning!
G
Winter tires with a tread depth under 1⁄6 in
(4 mm) must be replaced. They are no longer suitable for winter operation.
Always observe the speed rating of the
winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
maximum speed for which your tires are
rated is below the speed rating of your vehicle, you must place a notice to this effect
where it will be seen by the driver. Such no-
tices are available at your tire dealer or any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Warning!
G
If you use your spare tire when winter tires
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may
very well impair turning stability and that
overall driving stability may be reduced.
Adapt your driving style accordingly.
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter
tire at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Block heater (Canada only)
The engine is equipped with a block heater.
The electrical cable may be installed at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains
Snow chains should only be driven on
snow-covered roads at speeds not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains
as soon as possible when driving on roads
without snow.
Observe the following guidelines when using snow chains:
앫
Use of snow chains is not permissible
on all wheel/tire combinations.
앫
Snow chains should only be used on all
four wheels. With only two chains available, they should be mounted on the
rear wheels. Follow the manufacturer’s
mounting instructions.
앫
Only use snow chains that are approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will be glad to advise you on this
subject.
앫
Use of snow chains may be prohibited
depending on location. Always check
local and state laws before installing
snow chains.
i
When driving with snow chains, you
may wish to deactivate the ESP
(컄 page 79) before setting the vehicle
in motion. This will improve the
vehicle’s traction.
241
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have
your vehicle serviced by your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in accordance with the Service Booklet at the
times called for by the FSS (Flexible Service System).
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
accordance with the Service Booklet at the
designated times/mileage called for by
the FSS may result in vehicle damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
The type of service due is indicated in the
speedometer display field:
FSS will notify you when your next service
is due.
The interval between services depends
on your driving habits. A gentle driving
style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will
lengthen the interval between services.
9
Minor service (A)
½
Major service (B)
i
Approximately one month before your next
service is due, one of the following messages will appear in the multifunction display while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A):
Clearing the service indicator
SERVICE A IN XX DAYS
SERVICE A IN XX MILES (KM)
SERVICE A DUE NOW!
The service indicator is automatically
cleared
242
앫
after 10 seconds when you switch on
the ignition or when reaching the service threshold while driving
앫
after 30 seconds, once the suggested
service term has passed
You can also clear it yourself.
왘
Press the reset button on the instrument cluster (컄 page 25).
Service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested service term, you will see the following message in the multifunction display:
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX DAYS
SERVICE A EXCEEDED BY XX MILES (KM)
An accoustic signal will sound.
The Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will
reset the service indicator following a completed service.
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the service indicator
Resetting the service indicator
왘
In the event that the service on your vehicle is not carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, you
can reset the service indicator yourself.
Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 115).
왘
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator appears in the multifunction
display.
왘
Switch ignition on.
The standard display of the control system appears (컄 page 115).
i
왘
If the vehicle battery is disconnected,
the days of disconnection will not be included in the count shown by the service indicator. To arrive at the true
service deadline, you will need to subtract these days from the days shown
in the service indicator.
Press button k or j on the multifunction steering wheel until the FSS
indicator appears in the multifunction
display.
왘
Press the reset button (컄 page 25) for
about three seconds.
i
If the service indicator was inadvertently reset, have a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center correct it.
Only reset if the proper service has
been performed. Resetting the system
without performing proper service as
called for by the FSS will cause the FSS
to incorrectly determine the next service interval which will result in engine
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
This message appears in the tachometer:
Do not confuse the service indicator
with the engine oil level indicator :.
SERVICE INTERVAL?
RESET WITH R BUTTON FOR 3 SEC.
왘
To confirm, press reset button until you
hear a signal.
The service indicator now displays the
reset interval.
243
Operation
Vehicle care
왔 Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle
Warning!
G
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
Always follow the instructions on the particular container. Always open your vehicle’s
doors or windows when cleaning the inside.
Never use fluids or solvents that are not designed for cleaning your vehicle.
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle is subjected to varying external influences which, if gone unchecked, can attack the paintwork as well as the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme and varying climatic conditions, but
also by:
앫
Near the ocean
앫
In industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
emissions)
Tar
앫
During winter operation
Gravel and stone chipping
You should check your vehicle from time to
time for stone chipping or other damage.
Any damage should be repaired as soon as
possible to prevent corrosion.
앫
Air pollution
앫
Road salt
앫
앫
To avoid paint damage, you should immediately remove:
앫
Grease and oil
앫
Fuel
앫
Coolant
앫
Brake fluid
앫
Bird droppings
앫
Insects
앫
Tree resins, etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates the aggressiveness and potency of
the above adverse influences.
244
More frequent washings are necessary to
deal with unfavorable conditions:
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough check is a washing of the underbody
followed by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas need to be re-undercoated.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is
neither necessary nor recommended by
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
of incompatibility between materials used
in the production process and others applied later.
Operation
Vehicle care
We have selected car-care products and
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and
which always reflect the latest technology.
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved
car-care products at your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
the car-care products recommended here.
In such cases it is best to seek aid at your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
“how-to” information as well as references
to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care products.
Additional information can be found in the
booklet “Vehicle Care Guide”.
Power-washer
Paintwork, painted body components
When using a power-washer for cleaning
the vehicle, always observe manufacturer’s operating instructions.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
should be applied when water drops on the
paint surface do not “bead up”, normally
every three to five months, depending on
climate and washing detergent used.
!
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. The intense jet of water
can result in damage to the tire.
Always replace a damaged tire.
Always keep the jet of water moving
across the surface. Do not aim directly
at electrical parts, electrical connectors, sensors, seals, or other rubber
parts.
Tar stains
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
should be applied if the paint surface
shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
gloss).
Do not apply any of these products or wax
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the
hood is still hot.
왘
Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up
Stick for quick and provisional repairs
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
remover is recommended.
245
Operation
Vehicle care
Engine cleaning
Vehicle washing
Ornamental moldings
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
make sure to protect electrical components and connectors from the intrusion of
water and cleaning agents.
Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
in direct sunlight. Use only a mild car wash
detergent, such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo.
For regular cleaning and care of very dirty
chrome-plated parts, use a chrome cleaner.
Corrosion protection, such as MB Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the engine
compartment after every engine cleaning.
Before applying, all control linkage bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be protected from any wax.
Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a diffused jet of water. Direct only a very weak
spray towards the ventilation intake. Use
plenty of water and rinse the sponge and
chamois frequently.
Rinse with clear water and thoroughly dry
with a chamois. Do not allow cleaning
agents to dry on the finish.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior rear view mirrors prior to running the
vehicle through an automatic car wash to
prevent damage to the mirrors.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
of road salt as soon as possible.
When washing the underbody, do not forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
246
Headlamps, tail lamps, side marker,
turn signal lenses
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the lenses. Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry cloth
or sponge.
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the Rear Parking Assist
sensors*
Wiper blades
Window cleaning
왘
왘
Fold wiper arms forward.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the wiper blades, otherwise the
wiper motor can suddenly turn on and cause
injury.
1 Sensor
왘
Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, with plenty of water to clean
sensor 1.
To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and use only a soft, non-scratchy
cloth when cleaning the sensor. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth
or sponge.
왘
Clean the wiper blade inserts with a
clean cloth and detergent solution.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Fold wiper arms forward.
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the windshield, otherwise the wiper
motor can suddenly turn on and cause injury.
왘
Use a window cleaning solution on all
glass surfaces.
An automotive glass cleaner is recommended.
!
Fold the windshield wiper arms back
onto the windshield before turning the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
247
Operation
Vehicle care
Light alloy wheels
Instrument cluster
Hard plastic trim items
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
should be used for regular cleaning of the
light alloy wheels.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
If possible, clean wheels once a week with
Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, using a soft bristle brush and a strong spray
of water.
Follow instructions on container.
i
Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
The acid could lead to corrosion or may
damage the clear coat.
Steering wheel and gear selector lever
Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Leather Care.
Cup holder
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Headliner
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Seat belts
The webbing must not be treated with
chemical cleaning agents. Use only clear,
lukewarm water and soap. Do not dry the
webbing at temperatures above 176°F
(80°C) or in direct sunlight.
Warning!
G
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
not be able to provide adequate protection.
248
Operation
Vehicle care
Upholstery
Cloth upholstery
Illuminated door sill panels
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause
the upholstery to become permanently discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented.
Clean with soft bristle brush, or use a
dry-shampoo cleaner in case of excessive
dirt.
Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a
washing solution. Wipe with a cloth moistened in lukewarm solution. Do not use
scouring agents.
Leather upholstery
Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Exercise particular care when cleaning perforated leather as its underside should not
become wet.
MB Tex upholstery
Pour Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Care onto soft lint-free cloth and apply
with light pressure.
Plastic and rubber parts
Do not use oil or wax on these parts.
Wood trims
Dampen cloth using water and use damp
cloth to clean wood trims in your vehicle.
Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
249
250
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Brush guard*
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
251
Practical hints
What to do if …
왔 What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster
General information:
If a bulb in the instrument cluster fails to
come on during the bulb self-check when
turning the SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2, have it checked and replaced if
necessary.
Problem
Possible cause
Suggested solution
You engaged the differential locks. The ABS,
ESP, BAS, EBB and 4-ETS are switched off.
왘
The driving systems will switch on
again after the differential locks have
been disengaged.
The ABS has detected a malfunction and has
switched off. The ESP, BAS, EBB and 4-ETS
are also switched off (see messages in display).
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
Wheels will lock during hard braking
reducing steering capability.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
-
The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as the navigation system or
Rear Parking Assist* may also malfunction.
Failure to follow these instructions inThe brake system is still functioning normally creases the risk of an accident.
but without the ABS available.
252
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
-
The yellow ABS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The ABS has switched off because charging
voltage has fallen below 10 volts. The battery
may not be charged.
왘
Turn off unnecessary electric consumers.
When the battery voltage is above this
value again, the ABS is operational
again.
왘
Note the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 260).
253
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
;
3
Possible cause
(USA only)
(Canada only)
The red brake warning lamp
You are driving with the parking brake set.
comes on while driving and you
hear a warning sound.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 44).
왘
Also note the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 260).
The red brake warning lamp
comes on while driving.
왘
Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
vehicle and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
왘
Also note the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 260).
Warning!
G
Driving with the brake warning lamp illuminated can result in an accident. Have your
brake system checked immediately if the
brake warning lap stays on.
254
Suggested solution
There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You could be seriously burned.
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
;
3
-
Possible cause
Suggested solution
The EBB has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
switched off. You should be prepared for your
(Canada only)
왘 Have the system checked at an authovehicle to perform differently than normal
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck CenThe red brake warning lamp and when braking.
ter as soon as possible.
the yellow ABS indicator lamp
왘 Also note the messages in the multicome on when the engine is runfunction display (컄 page 260).
ning and you hear a warning
sound for approximately five secFailure to follow these instructions inonds.
creases the risk of accidents.
(USA only)
255
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
?
The yellow “CHECK ENGINE”
malfunction indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Possible cause
Suggested solution
There is a malfunction of:
왘
Have the vehicle checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
An on-board diagnostic connector is
used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics system. It allows the accurate identification of system malfunctions through
the readout of diagnostic trouble
codes. It is located near the hood lock
release on the upper left of footwell.
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Check the fuel cap.
Your gas tank is empty.
왘
After refuelling, start the engine three
or four times in succession. The
limp-home mode is canceled.
앫
The fuel management system
앫
The ignition system
앫
The emission control system
앫
Systems which impact emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive
emissions values and may switch the engine
to its limp-home (emergency operation)
mode. Serious damage can occur to the
emission system.
256
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
v
Possible cause
The yellow ESP warning lamp
You engaged the differential locks. The ABS,
comes on and remains on while ESP, BAS, EBB and 4-ETS are switched off.
driving.
The ESP is deactivated.
Suggested solution
왘
The driving systems will switch on
again after the differential locks have
been disengaged.
왘
Also note the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 260).
왘
Turn the ESP back on (컄 page 81).
Risk of accident! Adapt your speed and driv- If the ESP cannot be turned back on, have
ing to the prevailing road conditions.
the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as
soon as possible.
The ESP is deactivated because of interrupted power supply. The ABS may still be operational. The ESP has to be synchronized.
왘
Note the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 260).
The ESP, ABS, BAS, EBB or 4-ETS has detected a malfunction. All driving systems are
switched off.
왘
Note the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 260).
Risk of accident! Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
257
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem
<
Possible cause
Suggested solution
왘
Fasten your seat belt.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station.
왘
Also note the messages in the multifunction display (컄 page 260).
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp is The fuel cap is not closed tight.
blinking.
왘
Check the fuel cap.
1
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
The red seat belt non-usage
The warning lamp reminds you to fasten seat
warning lamp illuminates briefly belts.
after starting the engine.
The yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp
illuminates while driving.
The red SRS indicator lamp
comes on while driving.
Warning!
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
258
The fuel level has gone below the reserve
mark.
There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The airbags or emergency tensioning
device (ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or
fail to activate in an accident.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
system checked; otherwise the SRS may not
be activated when needed in an accident.
This could result in serious or fatal injury, or
it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which could also result in an accident
and/or injury to you or to others.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console
Problem
7
Possible cause
The indicator lamp comes on.
TM
A BabySmart child seat is installed on the
front passenger seat. Therefore the passenger front airbag is switched off.
Suggested solution
왘
Have the system checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
Make sure there is nothing between
seat cushion and child seat and check
installation of the child seat.
왘
If the light remains out, have the system checked as soon as possible by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
The system is malfunctioning when there is
no BabySmartTM child seat installed on the
front passenger seat.
7
The indicator lamp does not
come on with a BabySmartTM1
child seat properly installed on
the front passenger seat.
The system is malfunctioning.
Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint
to transport children on the front passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
1
BabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens Automotive Corp.
259
Practical hints
What to do if …
Messages in the multifunction display
Warning!
The control system shows warning and
malfunction messages in the multifunction
display.
Certain warning and malfunction messages are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in
this Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the malfunction memory menu in
the control system (컄 page 122) displays
both cleared and uncleared messages.
High-priority messages appear in the multifunction display in red colour.
Certain messages of high priority cannot
be cleared from the multifunction display
using the reset button (컄 page 112).
Other high-priority messages and messages of less immediate priority (regular display colours) can be cleared from the
multifunction display using the reset button and are then stored in the malfunction
message memory (컄 page 122).
260
G
All categories of messages contain important information which should be taken note
of and, where a malfunction is indicated, addressed as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Failure to repair condition noted may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty, or result in property damage or personal injury.
Warning!
G
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction display is inoperative. Systems that have a significant influence on handling performance
may not be functioning.
Contact your nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
i
Turning the SmartKey in starter switch
to position 2 causes all lamps as well
as the multifunction display to come
on. Make sure they are all in working
order before starting your journey.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
compilation of the most important warning
and malfunction messages that may appear in the multifunction display. Highpriority messages appear on a red background.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display symbol
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ABS
ABS SYSTEM
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ABS has detected a malfunction and
has switched off. The ESP, BAS, EBB and
4-ETS are also deactivated.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the ABS available.
Failure to follow these instructions inWheels will lock during hard braking, recreases the risk of accident.
ducing steering capability.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION:
The ABS or the ABS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Wheels will lock in hard braking reducing
steering capability.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
BAS
BRAKE ASSIST
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The BAS has detected a malfunction and
switched off.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Have the system checked at an authoThe brake system is still functioning norrized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Cenmally but without the BAS available.
ter as soon as possible.
Wheels will lock in hard braking reducing Failure to follow these instructions insteering capability.
creases the risk of accident.
261
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
BAS
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION:
The BAS or the BAS display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
DIFFERENTIAL ABS NOT AVAILABLE
LOCK
DIFFERENTIAL LOCKED
ESP
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION:
You have engaged the differential locks.
왘
The ABS switches on again after the differential locks have been disengaged.
The ESP or the ESP display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
ESP
NOT AVAILABLE
262
The ESP is temporarily unavailable. The
self-diagnosis has not been completed.
The display will clear itself after driving a
short-distance at more than approximately
12 mph (20 km/h).
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ESP
ESP
NOT AVAILABLE
The charging voltage has fallen below
10 volts and the ESP has switched off.
왘
When the voltage is above this value
again, the ESP is operational again.
왘
If necessary, have the generator (alternator) and battery checked.
왘
Synchronize the ESP. With vehicle stationary and the engine running, turn
the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right to synchronize the ESP.
The ESP is deactivated because of a malfunction or interrupted power supply. The
ABS and BAS might not be operational.
The system must be resynchronized.
If the ESP message does not go out:
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
!
When synchronizing the ESP, make
sure you can turn the steering wheel in
both directions as far as it will go without the wheels hitting any objects, e.g.
a road curb.
263
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ESP
ESP
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The ESP is switched off due to a malfunction or an interruption in the power supply.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without ESP, ABS and BAS avail- Failure to follow these instructions inable.
creases the risk of accident.
If in addition the ABS is malfunctioning,
only partial engine output will be available.
264
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol
#
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
BATTERY/ALTERNATOR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The battery was charged with a battery
charger or jump started.
왘
Have the battery checked at a service
station.
The battery is no longer charging.
Possible causes:
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
앫
alternator malfunctioning
If it is broken:
앫
broken poly-V-belt
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. Notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If it is intact:
UNDERVOLTAGE
ENGINE ON!
The battery has insufficient voltage.
왘
Turn off unnecessary electric consumers.
왘
Drive immediately to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
왘
Start the engine.
265
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
#
2
3
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
UNDERVOLTAGE
SWITCH CONSUMERS OFF!
The battery has insufficient voltage.
왘
Have the battery checked at a service station.
BRAKE WEAR
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The brake pads have reached their
wear limit.
왘
Have the brake pads replaced as
soon as possible.
BRAKE FLUID
VISIT WORKSHOP!
There is insufficient brake fluid in the
reservoir.
왘
Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle
and notify an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not
solve the problem.
G
Driving with the last message displayed can
result in an accident. Have your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot
engine parts and the brake fluid catching
fire. You can be seriously burned.
266
!
If you find that the brake fluid in the
brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the
minimum mark or below, have the
brake system checked for brake pad
thickness and leaks.
!
Brake pad thickness must be visually
checked by a qualified technician at the
intervals specified in the Service booklet.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
3
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ELEC. BRAKE BOOST.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The EBB has detected a malfunction and
has switched off.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the EBB available.
왘
Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of accident.
; (USA only)
! (Canada only)
PARK. BRAKE
RELEASE BRAKE!
You are driving with the parking brake
set.
왘
Release the parking brake
(컄 page 44).
267
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
B
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
COOLANT
CHECK LEVEL!
The coolant level is too low.
왘
Add coolant (컄 page 232).
왘
If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
G
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
!
Do not ignore the low engine coolant
level warning. Extended driving with
the message and symbol displayed
may cause serious engine damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount
of coolant in the cooling system. The
engine will overheat causing serious
engine damage.
Observe the coolant temperature display (컄 page 112).
268
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Ï
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
The coolant is too hot.
왘
Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
왘
Only start the engine again after the
message disappears. You could otherwise damage the engine.
G
Driving when your engine is badly overheated can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns and can occur just by opening
the hood. Stay away from the engine if you
see or hear steam coming from it.
During severe operating conditions and
stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
!
The engine should not be operated with
the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious
engine damage which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
269
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Ï
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
COOLANT
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
The poly-V-belt could be broken.
왘
Stop immediately and check the
poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘
Do not continue to drive. Otherwise
the engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump which may result in damage to the engine. Notify an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
If it is in order:
COOLANT
VISIT WORKSHOP!
270
The cooling fan for the coolant is malfunctioning.
왘
Do not continue to drive the vehicle
with this message displayed. Doing so
could result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
왘
Observe the coolant temperature display (컄 page 112).
왘
Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
Ñ
J
e
:
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
CRUISE CONTROL
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
DOOR OPEN!
You are attempting to drive with one or
more doors open.
왘
Close the doors.
ENGINE AIR FILTER
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The engine filter is clogged and must be
replaced.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as
possible.
USA only:
The engine oil level is too low.
왘
Add engine oil (컄 page 231) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 229).
ADD 1.0 Qt. ENGINE OIL
WHEN NEXT REFUELING!
Canada only:
ADD 1.0 LITER ENG. OIL
WHEN NEXT REFUELING!
When the ADD 1.0 QT. ENG. OIL - WHEN
NEXT REFUELLING! (Canada: 1.0 LITER)
message appears while the engine is running and at operating temperature, the engine oil level has dropped to approximately
the minimum level.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
leaks are noted, drive to the nearest service station where the engine oil should be
topped to the required level with an approved oil.
!
The engine oil level warnings should
not be ignored. Extended driving with
the symbol displayed could result in serious engine damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
271
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
:
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
REDUCE OIL LEVEL!
You have added too much engine oil.
There is a risk of damaging the engine or
the catalytic converter.
왘
Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal requirements with respect to its disposal.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
STOP, ENGINE OFF!
There is no oil in the engine. There is a
danger of engine damage.
왘
Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
soon as possible.
왘
Turn off the engine.
왘
Add engine oil (컄 page 231) and check
the engine oil level (컄 page 229).
ENGINE OIL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
It may be that there is water in the engine
oil.
왘
Have the oil checked.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The engine oil has dropped to a critical
level.
왘
Check the engine oil level
(컄 page 229) and add oil as required
(컄 page 231).
왘
If you must add engine oil frequently,
have the engine checked for possible
leaks.
왘
Have the measuring system checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
The measuring system is malfunctioning.
272
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
A
Y
I
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
RESERVE FUEL
GO TO GAS STATION
The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
왘
Refuel at the next gas station
(컄 page 224).
CHECK GAS CAP
SEE OPERATOR’S MANUAL
The fuel cap is not closed tightly.
왘
Check the fuel cap (컄 page 224).
HOOD OPEN!
You are driving with the hood open.
왘
Close the hood (컄 page 228).
REMOVE KEY!
You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
REPLACE KEY
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
No additional code available for SmartKey.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
273
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
274
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
3RD BRAKE LIGHT
CHECK LIGHT!
The high mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if
all light emitting diodes have stopped
working.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
ADD. TURN SIG., L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left turn signal in the exterior rear
view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting
diodes have stopped working.
왘
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.
ADD. TURN SIG., R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right turn signal in the exterior rear
view mirror is malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all light emitting
diodes have stopped working.
왘
Have the LEDs replaced as soon as
possible.
AUTOM. LIGHT ON
REMOVE KEY!
You have left the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
왘
Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
BRAKE LIGHT
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
Brake lamp illumination is delayed or
lamp is permanently on.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
BRAKE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
BRAKE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right brake lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FRONT FOGLIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FR. L. PARK. LAMP
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left parking lamps are malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
FR. R. PARK LAMP
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right parking lamps are malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
HIGH BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right high beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
275
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
276
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
LIGHT SENSOR
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
The lamp sensor is malfunctioning. The
headlamps switch on automatically.
왘
In the control system, set lamp operation to manual (컄 page 129).
왘
Switch on headlamps using the exterior lamp switch (컄 page 104).
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
LIGHTS
TURN OFF LIGHTS!
The display appears if the driver’s door is
opened with the engine shut off and no
SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘
Insert SmartKey in the starter switch.
왘
Switch off the lights (컄 page 104).
LOW BEAM, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
LOW BEAM, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right low beam lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
MARKER LIGHT, FL
CHECK LIGHT!
The left front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
MARKER LIGHT, FR
CHECK LIGHT!
The right front side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
REAR FOGLIGHT
CHECK LIGHT!
The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
REAR FOGLIGHT
TURN OFF
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
A lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb
is being used.
왘
Turn the rear fog lamp off.
REVERSE LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
The right backup lamp is malfunctioning.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TAIL LIGHT, L
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TAIL LIGHT, R
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A
backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., LF
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
277
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
.
278
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
TURN SIG., RF
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being
used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., LR
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The left rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
TURN SIG., RR
CHECK LIGHT!
BACK-UP LIGHT ON!
The right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A backup bulb is being
used.
왘
Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION
The display for the lamps or the system
is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The left turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
TURN SIG. MIRROR, L
CHECK LIGHT!
The right turn signal in the side mirror is
malfunctioning. This message will only
appear if all light emitting diodes have
stopped working.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
1
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
SERVICE
The system is malfunctioning. The airbags or emergency tensioning device
(ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to
activate in an accident.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
The system is malfunctioning. The airbags or emergency tensioning device
(ETD) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to
activate in an accident.
왘
Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
G
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not be
operational.
Otherwise the SRS may not be activated
when needed in an accident, which could result in serious or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily which
could also result in injury.
For your safety, we strongly recommend
that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
system checked.
279
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
<
§
Warning!
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
The seat belt system is malfunctioning.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
DRIVER’S SEAT BELT
FASTEN SEAT BELT!
The display reminds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts.
왘
Fasten the seat belts.
FR. PASS. SEAT BELT
FASTEN SEAT BELT!
The display reminds you and your passengers to fasten seat belts.
왘
Fasten the seat belts.
TC IN NEUTRAL
No gear has been selected in the transfer
case, it is in NEUTRAL.
왘
Engage transfer case to gear position
HIGH or LOW (컄 page 145).
G
If the transfer case is in NEUTRAL, the
P position of transmission will not hold vehicle. The parking brake must be applied to
hold vehicle in place.
280
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol
§
K
J
L
ì
Display message
Possible cause
Possible solution
TC SHIFT
CANCELLED
The shift process in the transfer case was
canceled because of a malfunction.
왘
Repeat the shift process (컄 page 145).
TC SHIFT CONDITIONS
NOT FULFILLED
You have not met the shift conditions for
a selection process in the transfer case.
왘
Repeat the shift process (컄 page 145).
TRANSFER CASE
VISIT WORKSHOP!
The transfer case is malfunctioning.
왘
Do not switch the transfer case on.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
CLOSE
SUNROOF!
You have opened the driver’s door with
the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
왘
Close the sliding/pop-up roof
(컄 page 166).
CLOSE
SUNROOF!
You have opened the driver’s door with
the SmartKey removed from the starter
switch and the sliding/pop-up roof open.
왘
Close the sliding/pop-up roof
(컄 page 166).
TELE AID
DRIVE TO WORKSHOP!
One or more main functions of the Tele
Aid system are malfunctioning.
왘
Have the Tele Aid system checked by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
FUNCTION
NOT AVAILABLE!
This display appears if button ì or
í on the multifunction steering wheel
is pressed and the vehicle is not equipped
with a telephone.
281
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display
Ê
G
Possible cause
Possible solution
TRUNK OPEN!
This message will appear whenever the
tailgate is open.
왘
Close the tailgate.
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION:
The instrument cluster display is malfunctioning.
왘
Continue driving with added caution.
왘
Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center as soon as
possible.
왘
Have the electronic systems checked
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
왘
Add washer fluid (컄 page 339).
Some systems themselves may also have
failed.
±
W
282
VISIT WORKSHOP!
DISPLAY MALFUNCTION:
WASHER FLUID
CHECK LEVEL!
Certain electronic systems are unable to
relay information to the control system.
The following systems may have failed:
앫
Coolant temperature display
앫
Tachometer
앫
Cruise control display
The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3
of total reservoir capacity.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit
Vehicle tool kit
The first aid kit is stored in the storage
pocket in the front passenger door.
The vehicle tool kit is stored under a cover
in the rear footwell.
1 First aid kit
i
Check expiration dates and contents
for completeness at least once a year
and replace missing/expired items.
The following is included:
앫
Vehicle tool kit
앫
Wheel wrench
앫
Vehicle jack
1 Cover
2 Tab
왘
Fold cover 1 to the side.
왘
Pull vehicle tool kit out using tab 2.
283
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Vehicle jack
Warning!
The vehicle jack is under the rear bench
seat.
1 Cover
2 Tab
3 Vehicle jack
왘
Fold the rear bench seat forward
(컄 page 177).
왘
Open cover 1.
왘
Open tab 2 and remove vehicle
jack 3.
284
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle under the axle housing. To
help avoid personal injury, use the jack only
to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always firmly set parking brake and block
wheels before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack is positioned correctly under the axle housing. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
Please also observe the safety guidelines
in the “Flat tire” section (컄 page 306)
when using the jack.
CD changer
The CD changer is located on the left side
of the cargo compartment.
CD changer
i
For CD changer instructions, see separate COMAND operator’s manual.
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Spare wheel
The spare wheel is located under a cover
on the outside of the vehicle’s tailgate.
For information on rim and tire specifications, see (컄 page 329) and (컄 page 330).
왘
Open lock for cover ring 1 with
key 2 for the spare wheel cover.
왘
Fold tab 3 downwards.
Removing cover
5 Catch
6 Recess
4 Cover plate
1 Cover ring
2 Key
3 Tab
왘
Pull cover ring 1 slightly outwards in
direction of arrows and remove.
왘
Pull cover plate 4 upward towards
you.
i
When replacing cover plate 4, make
sure catch 5 engages in recess 6.
Make sure the lock faces downwards
when mounting cover ring 1.
For safety reasons, check regularly that
the spare wheel is securely fastened.
285
Practical hints
Where will I find ...?
Removing the spare wheel
Warning!
G
Make sure no one is injured when removing
the spare wheel.
Grip wheel from the sides.
Keep hands from beneath the wheel.
i
After changing the wheel, secure the
replaced wheel on the spare wheel carrier. Make sure the wheel cannot come
loose.
Cover the wheel with the cover plate.
Repair or replace damaged tire as soon
as possible and return spare tire as
original spare.
1 Mounting screws
왘
Unscrew mounting screws 1.
왘
Remove the spare wheel.
286
For more information on changing the
wheel, see “Flat tire” (컄 page 306).
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle
Unlocking the tailgate
If you are unable to unlock the tailgate with
the SmartKey, open the tailgate with the
mechanical key as follows:
If you are unable to unlock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, open the driver’s door and
the tailgate using the mechanical key.
The passenger door cannot be unlocked
manually.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
1 Mechanical key locking tab
2 Mechanical key
왘
Move locking tab 1 in direction of arrow and slide the mechanical key 2
out of the housing.
Unlocking the driver’s door
1 Unlocking in an emergency
2 Lock cylinder
3 Handle
왘
왘
Insert the mechanical key into the tailgate lock.
왘
Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise to position 1 and hold it in this
컄컄
position.
Unlock the door with the mechanical
key. To do so, push the mechanical key
in the lock until it stops and turn it to
the left.
287
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
컄컄왘
왘
Press lock cylinder 2 and pull on tailgate handle 3.
Open the tailgate to the side.
Warning!
G
The tailgate swings open to one side. Always
make sure there is sufficient clearance for
tailgate.
i
Unlocking your vehicle with the mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft
alarm system. To cancel the alarm, do
one of the following:
Locking the vehicle
Changing batteries in the SmartKey
If you are unable to lock the vehicle with
the SmartKey, lock it with the mechanical
key as follows:
If the batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘
Close the passenger doors and the tailgate.
왘
Press the central locking switch in the
cockpit (컄 page 92).
왘
Check to see whether the locking
knobs on the passenger doors are still
visible. If necessary, push them down
manually.
왘
Slide the mechanical key 2 out of the
SmartKey.
앫
Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
왘
Lock the driver’s door with the mechanical key.
앫
Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
왘
Check if the tailgate is locked. If neccessary lock the tailgate with the mechanical key.
288
Warning!
G
Keep the batteries out of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘
Remove mechanical key (컄 page 287).
왘
Insert the mechanical key 1 in side
opening and push briefly gray slide.
Battery compartment 2 is unlatched.
왘
Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
SmartKey housing in direction of arrow.
왘
Remove the batteries.
왘
Using a lint-free cloth, insert new batteries under the contact spring with the
plus (+) side facing up.
왘
Return battery compartment into housing until locked in place.
왘
Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey.
i
When inserting the batteries, make
sure they are clean and free of lint.
1 Mechanical key
2 Battery compartment
Replacement batteries:
Lithium, type CR 2025 or equivalent.
i
When changing batteries, always replace both batteries.
The required replacement batteries are
available at any Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
3 Battery
4 Contact spring
289
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Manually unlocking the transmission
gear selector lever
Fuel filler flap
The emergency release is in the cargo
compartment behind the rear panel trim.
In the case of power failure the transmission gear selector lever can be manually
unlocked, e.g. to tow the vehicle.
3 Release strap
왘
1 Edge protection
2 Rear panel trim
왘
Open the tailgate.
왘
Remove edge protection 1 from the
door pillar.
왘
Remove rear panel trim 2.
290
Pull strap 3 upwards.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked and can
be opened.
1 Pin
Practical hints
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
왘
Insert a pin 1, e.g. ball point pen, into
the covered opening.
왘
Perform the following two steps simultaneously:
왘
왘
Push pin 1 down.
왘
Move gear selector lever from
position P.
Remove pin 1.
The cover returns to its closed position after moving the gear selector lever to positions D+ and D-.
i
The gear selector lever is locked again
when moving it to position P.
291
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
왔 Opening/closing in an emergency
왘
Sliding/pop-up roof
You can open or close the sliding/pop-up
roof manually in the case of power failure.
왘
The sliding/pop-up roof drive is located on
the left side of the cargo compartment behind the rear panel trim.
3 Key (vehicle tool kit)
4 Screwdriver (vehicle tool kit)
i
Do not disconnect electrical connectors.
1 Edge protection
2 Rear panel trim
왘
Open the tailgate.
왘
Remove edge protection 1 from door
pillar.
왘
Remove rear panel trim 1.
292
왘
Fit key 3 into hexagon nut of drive.
왘
Insert screwdriver 4 into the key as a
lever.
Turn screwdriver 4 clockwise to:
앫
close slide roof
앫
raise roof at the rear
Turn screwdriver 4 counterclockwise
to:
앫
open slide roof
앫
lower roof at the rear
Practical hints
Brush guard*
왔 Brush guard*
Warning!
G
The brush guard is designed solely to enhance the appearance of the vehicle and
help protect grille and head lights from minor mishaps, either on- or off-road. Since
the safety characteristics are limited in the
event of an accident, brush guards are not
intended to prevent injury or damage in the
event of an accident. Also check state and
local regulations on installation and use.
i
Only lower brush guard to clean head
lamps or to replace bulbs.
Raise and lower brush guard in an open
space with plenty of room.
To help prevent personal injury when opening or closing the brush guard, use extreme
caution not to trap hands or feet.
The brush guard must be in raised and
locked position while driving.
293
Practical hints
Brush guard*
Lowering and raising brush guard
1 Lock and unlocking handle
2 Quick lock
3 Lock
4 End stop joint
294
Lowering
Raising and securing
왘
While holding brush guard firmly, open
quick lock 2 using lock and unlocking
handle 1.
왘
왘
Gently lower brush guard until it
reaches its fully lowered position.
Flip up brush guard until it contacts end
stop joint 4.
Quick lock stop pin 2 must engage
the cross slot recess in lock 3.
왘
Now turn quick lock 2 so that quick
lock makes contact with end stop
joint 4.
왘
Lock quick lock 2 on both sides of
brush guard using lock and unlocking
handle 1.
!
Make sure both quick stop pins 2 are
seated fully in lock 3.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왔 Replacing bulbs
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
exterior lighting and signaling. It is therefore essential that all bulbs and lamp assemblies are in good working order at all
times.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
for headlamp adjustment.
Bulbs
Front lamps
Lamp
1 Additional turn signal lamp
LED
2 Turn signal lamp
1156 NA
3 Side marker lamp
T4W
4 High and low beam
H4 60 (55 W)
Parking and standing lamp
5 Fog lamp
i
Type
T4W
H3 (55 W)
Backup bulbs will be brought into use
when the following lamps malfunction:
앫
Parking lamps
앫
Turn signal lamps
앫
Tail lamps
295
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps
Lamp
Notes on bulb replacement
Type
Warning!
6 High mounted brake LED
lamp
7 Turn signal lamp
PY 21 W
Brake lamp
P 21 W
Tail, parking and
standing lamp
R5W
8 Backup lamp
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow the lamp to cool down before changing
a bulb.
9 License plate lamps C 5 W
P 21 W
b Side marker lamp
T4W
296
Your hands should be dry and free of oil
and grease.
앫
If the newly installed bulb does not
come on, visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫
Have the LEDs for the following lamps
replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
P 21 W
a Rear fog lamp
G
앫
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you:
앫
The additional turn signals in the exterior rear view mirrors
앫
touch or move it when hot
앫
The high mounted brake lamp
앫
drop the bulb
앫
scratch the bulb
Wear eye and hand protection.
앫
Use only 12 volt bulbs of the same type
and with the specified watt rating.
앫
Switch lights off before changing a bulb
to prevent short circuits.
앫
Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
handling bulbs.
i
Have the headlamp settings checked
regularly by a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Do not turn the headlamp adjusting
screws. If the adjusting screws are
turned, the headlamp setting must be
checked by a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps
Removing
Headlamp assembly (halogen)
i
For vehicles with brush guard*:
Fold the brush guard* down before replacing bulbs (컄 page 293).
G 55 AMG:
Remove the protective grille before replacing the bulbs.
4 Securing screw (headlamp)
Left headlamp, right headlamp laterally reversed
왘
1 Securing screw (trim panel)
2 Head lamp trim panel
3 Headlamp
Unscrew headlamp-securing
screws 4.
왘
Remove headlamp 3.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Unscrew securing screws 1.
왘
Remove head lamp trim panel 2 and
seal.
Installing
왘
Insert headlamp 3 and screw in headlamp-securing screws 4.
왘
Install head lamp trim panel 2 and
seal and screw in securing screws 1.
297
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘
Clip in retainer spring 4.
왘
Plug electrical connector 3 onto
bulb 5.
왘
Press on protection cover 1.
Parking and standing lamp bulb
1 Protection cover
2 Electrical connector (parking and
standing lamps)
3 Electrical connector (high and low
beam)
4 Retainer spring
5 Bulb for high and low beam
6 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamps
High and low beam bulb
298
왘
Remove protection cover 1.
왘
Pull off electrical connector 3.
왘
Unclip retainer spring 4.
왘
Remove bulb 5.
왘
Insert new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.
왘
Pull off electrical connector 2 from
bulb socket 6.
왘
Push bulb into bulb socket 6, turn
counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in bulb socket 6, push
in and turn clockwise until it clicks in.
왘
Plug electrical connector 2 onto bulb
socket 6.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front fog lamp
Fog lamp bulb
Removing
4 Securing screw (fog lamp)
5 Adjusting screw (fog lamp)
Right front fog lamp, left front fog lamp laterally reversed
1 Securing screw (trim panel)
2 Fog lamp trim panel
3 Fog lamp
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Unscrew securing screws 1.
왘
Remove fog lamp trim panel 2 and
seal.
왘
Unscrew fog lamp-securing screws 4.
왘
Remove fog lamp 3.
Installing
왘
Insert fog lamp 3 and screw in fog
lamp-securing screws 4.
왘
Reinstall fog lamp trim panel 2 and
screw in securing screws 1.
6 Electrical connector
7 Retainer spring
8 Bulb socket
왘
Pull off electrical connector 6.
왘
Unclip retainer spring 7.
왘
Pull out bulb socket 8.
왘
Insert the new bulb so that the base locates in the recess on the holder.
왘
Clip in retainer spring 7.
왘
Plug electrical connector 6 together.
299
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front turn signal lamp
Side marker lamp
i
The following description applies to both
the front and the rear side marker lamps.
G 55 AMG:
Remove the protective grille before replacing bulbs.
3 Bulb
1 Securing screw
2 Turn signal lens
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Unscrew securing screws 1.
왘
Remove turn signal lens 2.
300
왘
Push bulb 3 into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise until it clicks in.
왘
Reinstall turn signal lens 2 and screw
in securing screws 1.
Front side marker shown
1 Securing screw
2 Side marker lamp housing
왘
Switch off the lights.
i
왘
Unscrew securing screws 1.
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
Otherwise turn signal lens 2 could be
damaged.
왘
Remove side marker lamp housing 2.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps
Tail lamp assemblies
i
G 55 AMG:
Remove the protective grille before replacing bulbs.
3 Dust cover
4 Bulb
왘
Remove dust cover 3.
왘
왘
Press catch aside and pull out bulb
socket from side marker lamp
housing 2.
Push bulb 4 into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise until it clicks in.
왘
Insert bulb socket in lamp housing 2
and reinstall the dust cover.
왘
Reinstall side marker lamp housing 2
and screw in securing screws 1.
i
Do not overtighten the securing
screw 1. Otherwise side marker lamp
housing 2 could be damaged.
1 Securing screw
2 Lens
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Unscrew securing screws 1.
왘
Remove lens 2.
301
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Rear fog lamp/Backup lamp
3 Bulb for turn signal lamp
4 Bulb for tail lamp
5 Bulb for brake lamp
왘
Push defective bulb 3, 4 or 5 into
socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise until it clicks in.
왘
Reinstall lens 2 and screw in securing
screws 1.
i
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
Otherwise lens 2 could be damaged.
302
3 Bulb
1 Securing screw
2 Lens
왘
Push bulb 3 into socket, turn counterclockwise and remove.
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
왘
Unscrew securing screws 1.
Insert new bulb in socket, push in and
turn clockwise until it clicks in.
왘
Remove lens 2.
왘
Reinstall lens 2 and screw in securing
screws 1.
i
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
Otherwise lens 2 could be damaged.
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp
3 Tubular lamp
1 Securing screw
2 Holder with light lens
왘
Switch off the lights.
왘
Unscrew securing screws 1.
왘
Remove holder 2.
왘
Replace tubular lamp 3.
왘
Reinstall holder 2 and screw in securing screws 1.
i
Do not overtighten securing screws 1.
Otherwise holder with light lens 2
could be damaged.
303
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
왔 Replacing wiper blades
Warning!
G
For safety reasons, remove SmartKey from
starter switch before replacing a wiper
blade. Otherwise the motor could suddenly
turn on and cause injury.
The wiper with air spoiler should be
mounted on the driver’s side
For your convenience, we recommend
that you have this work carried out by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Removing wiper blades
왘
Fold the wiper arm forward.
!
Never open the hood when the wiper
arm is folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the
wiper arm back. If released, the force
of the impact from the tensioning
spring could crack the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arms to contact
the windshield glass without a wiper
blade inserted.
Make certain that the wiper blades are
properly installed. Improperly installed
wiper blades may cause windshield
damage.
304
1 Safety tab
2 Wiper blade
3 Wiper arm
4 Attachment link
왘
Turn wiper blade 2 at a right angle to
wiper arm 3.
왘
Press safety tab 1 of attachment
link 4 down and slide wiper blade 2
from the end of wiper arm 3.
왘
Remove wiper blade 2.
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Installing wiper blades
왘
Guide wiper blade 2 so that opening
goes through wiper arm 3.
왘
Press wiper blade 2 into arch of wiper
arm 3 until locking spring 1 engages
in attachment link 4.
왘
Fold the wiper arm back to rest on the
windshield.
305
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
왘
Information on spare wheel
Park the vehicle as far as possible from
moving traffic on a hard surface.
왘
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
왘
Engage the steering wheel lock in the
straight ahead position and set the
parking brake.
왘
Move the gear selector lever to P.
왘
Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
a safe distance from the roadway.
When you replace the vehicle’s tires, you
can use the spare wheel as a regular wheel
if:
앫
it is not more than six years old
앫
rim and tire are the same model as the
regular wheels
Warning!
G
왘
Remove the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 283) and the jack
(컄 page 284).
왘
If the spare tire is more than six years old or
is not the same model as the regular tires,
have the spare tire replaced with a new tire
at the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Remove the spare wheel from the
spare wheel mounting bracket
(컄 page 285).
Never operate the vehicle with more than
one spare tire.
Warning!
G
For your safety, remove spare wheel from
the spare wheel mounting bracket before
undertaking any further steps.
306
Warning!
G
G 55 AMG only
Vehicles with different tire dimensions on
the front and rear axle: rim and tire size of
spare wheel and normal wheel differ. Handling will be adversely affected when the
spare wheel is used.
Do not exceed the maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the spare wheel
Warning!
왘
Prepare the vehicle (컄 page 306).
Lifting the vehicle
왘
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away
by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
(not included) or other sizable objects.
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘
Place one chock in front of and one behind the wheel that is diagonally opposite to the wheel being changed.
When changing wheel on a hill:
왘
Place chocks on the downhill side
blocking both wheels of the other axle.
G
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle under the axle housing. To
help avoid personal injury, use the jack only
to lift the vehicle during a wheel change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always firmly set parking brake and block
wheels before raising vehicle with jack.
Do not disengage parking brake while the
vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
always vertical (plumb line) when in use, especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on level surface. Make sure the jack is positioned correctly under the axle housing. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under
the vehicle.
Wheel wrench
왘
On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
not yet remove the wheel bolts (approximately one full turn with wrench).
If the vehicle is not raised as described, it
could slip off the jack as a result of vibrations (e.g. opening or closing a door or the
tailgate).
307
Practical hints
Flat tire
Pump handle (three pieces)
Jack
왘
Place jack on firm ground.
1 Indent for activation of release bolt 2
2 Release bolt
왘
왘
왘
Position jack under the axle housing,
so that it is always vertical (plumb-line)
as seen from the side, even if the vehicle is parked on an incline.
Assemble the pump handle for the
jack. The pump handle is located in the
vehicle tool kit.
Close release bolt 2.
To do so, turn indent 1 to the right in
the pump lever until its stop.
Be certain the jack arm is positioned
correctly under the axle housing (axle
must fall into jack contour).
i
Never turn release bolt 2 more than
one or two revolutions. Hydraulic fluid
can otherwise escape.
왘
Jack up the vehicle by pumping (arrow)
until the wheel is clear of the ground.
Never start engine while vehicle is
raised.
308
Practical hints
Flat tire
Removing the wheel
Mounting the new wheel
왘
왘
Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
왘
Push the wheel onto the wheel hub and
press firmly.
왘
Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
Remove the wheel bolts.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the bolt
and wheel hub threads.
왘
Remove the wheel.
Warning!
G
Make sure no one is injured when removing
the wheel.
Grip wheel from the sides.
Keep hands from beneath the wheel.
Warning!
Warning!
G
Use only genuine equipment
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel
bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
tip over.
G
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be repaired immediately. Do not continue to drive
under these circumstances! Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
or call Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to
come off. This could cause an accident.
Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
309
Practical hints
Flat tire
Lowering the vehicle
왘
Using the pump lever, open the lowering screw on the jack approximately
one turn (컄 page 308).
The vehicle is resting fully on its own
weight.
왘
Remove the jack.
After use, disassemble pump handle
(컄 page 308) and store jack in the designated storage compartment
(컄 page 284).
1-5
310
Wheel bolts
왘
Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, following the diagonal sequence illustrated (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
Observe a tightening torque of 97 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
Warning!
왘
Press the jack piston in again and close
the lowering screw. Store the jack
(컄 page 284) and the other vehicle
tools (컄 page 283).
왘
After changing the wheel, secure the
damaged wheel on the spare wheel
mounting bracket (컄 page 286). Make
sure the wheel cannot come loose.
왘
Check the tire inflation pressure and
correct it if necessary.
G
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel as soon as possible. The
wheels could come loose if they are not
tightened to a torque of 97 lb-ft (130 Nm).
A table with the tire pressure values for
your vehicle is located on the fuel filler
flap.
Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
The battery is located in front of the rear
seat bench and below the cup holder
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these instructions can result in severe injury or death.
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 235).
Never lean over batteries while connecting,
you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Warning!
G
Charging the battery
G
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit.
Warning!
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk
of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Never charge a battery while still installed in
the vehicle. Gases may escape during charging and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
Batteries contain materials that can harm
the environment if disposed of improperly.
Large 12 volt storage batteries contain
lead.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred
method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
for recycling.
Have the battery removed at a
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
!
Have the battery checked regularly by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Refer to Service Booklet for maintenance intervals or contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for further information.
If you charge the battery yourself, make
sure to comply with the operating instructions for your battery charger.
311
Practical hints
Battery
Disconnecting the battery
!
i
i
With a disconnected battery
The following procedures must be carried out following any interruption of
battery power (e.g. due to reconnection):
앫
you will no longer be able to turn
the SmartKey in the starter switch
앫
the gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P
Never loosen or detach battery terminal clamps while the engine is running
or the SmartKey is in the starter switch.
Otherwise the alternator and other
electronic components could be severely damaged.
Reconnecting the battery
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Disconnect the battery negative lead.
왘
왘
Remove the cover from the positive terminal.
Connect the positive lead and fasten its
cover.
왘
Connect the negative lead.
왘
Disconnect the battery positive lead.
!
왘
Remove the breather hose from the
battery.
Never invert the terminal connections.
왘
Install the breather hose.
!
The battery, its filler caps and the vent
tube must always be securely installed
when the vehicle is in operation.
312
앫
Set the clock (see COMAND operator’s manual).
앫
Resynchronize the front seat head
restraints and seat adjustment fore,
aft (컄 page 95).
앫
Synchronize the ESP (컄 page 263).
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
Warning!
G
Failure to follow these directions will cause
damage to the electronic components, and
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death.
Never lean over batteries while connecting
or jump starting, you might get injured.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking, etc.
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal
injury.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
If the battery is discharged, the engine can
be started with jumper cables and the battery of another vehicle. Observe the following:
앫
Jump starting should only be performed
when the engine and catalytic converter are cold.
앫
Do not start the engine if the battery is
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
앫
Only use 12 volt battery to jump start
your vehicle. Jump starting with a more
powerful battery could damage the vehicle’s electrical system, which will not
be covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
앫
Use only jumper cables with sufficient
cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
앫
Always make sure the jumper cables
are not on or near pulleys, fans, or other parts that move when an engine is
started or running.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.
Do not attempt to start the engine using a battery quick charge unit.
If engine does not run after several unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
checked at the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
damage the catalytic converter and
may present a fire risk.
Make sure the jumper cables do not
have loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not
touch any other metal part while the
other end is still attached to a battery.
!
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
313
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning!
Now you can again turn on the electrical
consumers. Do not turn on the lights under
any circumstances.
G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
왘
Observe all safety instructions and precautions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 311).
You can now turn on the lights.
왘
The jump-start contacts are located in the
engine compartment.
왘
Make sure the two vehicles do not
touch.
왘
Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘
Apply parking brake.
왘
Shift gear selector lever to position P.
왘
Start engine of the vehicle with the
charged battery and run at idle speed.
314
1 Cover
2 Positive (+) terminal
3 Negative (-) terminal
왘
Open cover 1 of the positive terminal
of both vehicles.
왘
Connect the positive terminals 2 of
the batteries with the jumper cable.
Clamp cable to discharged battery first.
왘
Connect negative terminals 3 of the
batteries with the jumper cable. Clamp
cable to charged battery first.
왘
Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
Remove the jumper cables first from
negative terminals 3 of the batteries
and then from positive terminals 2.
Have the battery checked at the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
왔 Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle be transported with all wheels off the
ground using flatbed or appropriate wheel
lift/dolly equipment. This method is preferable to other types of towing.
!
Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment, with SmartKey in starter switch
turned to position 0.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
Towing with sling-type equipment over
bumpy roads will damage radiator and
supports.
To prevent damage during transport,
do not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts. Use the towing eyes.
Switch off the ESP (컄 page 79),
tow-away alarm (컄 page 83) and the
automatic central locking
(컄 page 133).
When circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle may be towed with all wheels on the
!
ground only so far as necessary to have the
vehicle moved to a safe location where the
recommended towing methods can be employed.
!
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the gear selector lever
must be in position N and the SmartKey must be in starter switch
position 2.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, the vehicle may be
towed only for distances up to 30 miles
(50 km) and at a speed not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h).
If the vehicle is towed with one axle
raised (observe instructions regarding
flexible drive shaft and propeller
shafts), the engine must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 1).
Otherwise, the 4-ETS may become engaged which may cause loss of towing
control.
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
Warning!
G
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make certain that the SmartKey
is in starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch
position 0 for an extended period of time, it
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this
case, the steering is locked. To unlock, remove SmartKey from starter switch and reinsert.
Always tow with a tow bar if:
앫
the engine will not run
앫
there is a malfunction in the power supply or in the vehicle’s electrical system
as that will be necessary to adequately control the towed vehicle.
315
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Warning!
G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
i
The gear selector lever will remain
locked in position P and the SmartKey
will not turn in the starter switch if the
battery is disconnected or discharged.
See notes on the battery (컄 page 311)
or on jump starting (컄 page 313).
Manually unlocking transmission gear
selector lever (컄 page 290).
316
i
!
To signal turns while being towed with
hazard warning flasher in use, turn
SmartKey in starter switch to
position 2 and activate combination
switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner – only the selected turn signal will operate.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard warning flasher will operate again.
When towing the vehicle with all wheels
on the ground, note the following:
With the automatic central locking activated and the SmartKey in starter
switch position 2, the vehicle doors
lock if the wheels are turning at vehicle
speeds of approx. 9 mph (15 km/h) or
more.
To prevent the vehicle doors from locking, deactivate the automatic central
locking (컄 page 133).
Towing of the vehicle should only be
done using the towing eye. Never attach tow cable, tow rope or tow rod to
vehicle chassis, frame or suspension
parts.
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Transporting the vehicle
Towing the vehicle - various problem
scenarios
When transporting the vehicle, you can use
the towing eyes for pulling the vehicle onto
a trailer or transporter.
왘
!
When removing drive shaft, place M10
nuts on bolts as distance sleeves and
tighten using M8 nuts.
Always install new self-locking nuts
when reinstalling the drive shaft.
Move the gear selector lever to position N.
왘
Shift the transfer case to neutral position N.
왘
To avoid damaging the vehicle, it
should only be tied down on the
wheels/wheel rims, not on chassis
components such as the transverse
link or trailing arm.
왘
Comply with all towing information
(컄 page 315).
In case of engine damage, transmission
damage or malfunctions in electrical
equipment
왘
Move the gear selector lever to position N.
왘
Shift the transfer case to neutral position N.
In case of transfer case damage or for
towing vehicle distances exceeding
30 miles (50 km)
The propeller shafts to the drive axles must
be removed.
In case of front axle damage
Raise the front axle when towing. The propeller shaft between the rear axle and the
transfer case must be removed.
In case of rear axle damage
When the rear axle is raised, the vehicle
can only be towed with a wheel lift or a dolly placed under its front wheels.
317
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Front towing eye
Rear towing eye
Freeing a stranded vehicle
In the front, the towing eye is located on
the driver’s side under the bumper.
In the rear, the towing eye is located on the
driver’s side under the bumper.
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
be done with the greatest of care, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
Avoid pulling the vehicle jerkily or diagonally, since it could result in damage to the
chassis alignment.
Never try to free a vehicle that is still coupled to a trailer.
1 Towing eye
318
1 Towing eye
If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward
in its own previously made tracks.
Practical hints
Fuses
왔 Fuses
i
Fuse box in passenger compartment
Fuse box in battery box
Only install fuses that have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz and
that have the specified amperage rating.
Opening
The battery box is located under the cover
in the rear footwell.
Replacement of fuses can only be performed by a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Never attempt to repair or bridge a
blown fuse. Have the cause determined
and remedied by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The fuse box is located on the left side of
the cockpit in the passenger compartment. It contains:
앫
a fuse chart
앫
spare fuses
앫
a special spare extractor
1 Cover
왘
Open the driver’s door.
왘
Remove cover 1 in direction of arrows.
Additional fuses are located in:
앫
battery box
앫
front passenger footwell under the
cockpit
앫
middle tunnel
319
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in front passenger footwell
i
We recommend having the fuses
changed at a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Opening
3 Mounting screw
4 Cover
1 Mounting screw
2 Cover
왘
Unscrew mounting screws 1.
왘
Remove cover 2 in direction of arrows.
320
왘
Unscrew mounting screws 3.
왘
Remove cover 4 in direction of
arrows.
5 Fuse box
6 Mounting screw
To make changing the fuses easier, fuse
box 5 can be folded down slightly:
왘
Unscrew mounting screws 6.
왘
Fold fuse box 5 downward.
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in middle tunnel
왘
Remove both front end stops 1 of the
front passenger seat tracks with a
screwdriver.
왘
Move front passenger seat fully forward.
i
We recommend having the fuses
changed at a Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Removing front end stops
!
When reinstalling front passenger seat
track stops, place end stops in correct
position. For your safety, maintain
proper spacing 2.
Warning!
Front end stop on the right seat rail, left
seat rail laterally reversed
1 Front end stop
2 Spacing
Opening fuse box
G
Do not drive the vehicle when the front end
stops are not correctly installed. Failure to
reinstall stops as indicated may result in serious injury in certain frontal crashes.
1 Mounting screw
2 Cover
왘
Unscrew mounting screws 1.
왘
Remove cover 2 in direction of arrows.
Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
possible rearward from the dashboard when
the seat is occupied. Comply with information on occupant safety (컄 page 56).
321
322
Technical data
Spare parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main dimensions, vehicle weights and ratings
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Consumer information
323
Technical data
Spare parts service
왔 Spare parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the
necessary technical data for your vehicle.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Centers maintain a stock of genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts required for maintenance and repair work. In addition, strategically located parts distribution centers
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300 000 different spare parts
for Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subjected to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, manufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
324
!
The use of non-genuine Merceds-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized
by Mercedes-Benz could damage the
vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or
could compromise the vehicle’s durability or safety.
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of
the “warranties” printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet. Your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center will exchange or repair any defective parts originally installed in the vehicle
in accordance with the terms of the following warranties:
앫
New vehicle limited warranty
앫
Emission system warranty
앫
Emission performance warranty
앫
California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont emission control systems
warranty
Replacement parts and accessories are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Spare Parts
and Accessories warranties, copies of
which are available at any Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Information Booklet
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
325
Technical data
Identification labels
왔 Identification labels
When ordering spare parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine numbers.
1 Certification label and Paintwork Number located on the driver’s B-pillar
326
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(lower edge of windshield)
3 Engine number (engraved on engine)
4 Information label, California version
5 Emission control label
Vacuum line routing for emission control system
Technical data
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
왔 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
For dimensions of the poly-V-belt, see
technical data (컄 page 328).
G 500/G 55 AMG
1 Automatic belt tensioner
2 Power steering pump
3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Crankshaft
5 Coolant pump
6 Generator (alternator)
7 Idler pulley
327
Technical data
Engine
왔 Engine
G 500 (463.2491)
G 55 AMG (463.246)1
Engine
113
113
Mode of operation
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders
8
8
Bore
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
3.82 in (97.00 mm)
Stroke
3.31 in (84.00 mm)
3.60 in (92.00 mm)
Total piston displacement
303.0 cu in (4966 cm )
331.8 cu in (5439 cm3)
Compression ratio
10:1
10.5:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349
292 hp/5500 rpm
(218 kW/5500 rpm)
349 hp/5500 rpm
(260 kW/5500 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349
336 lb-ft/2800 - 4000 rpm
(456 Nm/2800 - 4000 rpm)
391 lb-ft/3250 rpm
(530 Nm/3250 rpm)
Maximum engine speed
6000 rpm
6000 rpm
Firing order
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt
2380 mm
2380 mm
1
3
The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
328
Technical data
Rims and tires
왔 Rims and tires
Use only tires and rims which have been
specifically developed for your vehicle and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Other tires and rims can have detrimental
effects, such as
앫
poor handling characteristics
앫
increased noise
앫
increased fuel consumption
!
i
Moreover, tires and rims not approved
by Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimensional variations and different tire deformation characteristics
that could cause them to come into
contact with the vehicle body or axle
parts. This may result in damage to the
tires or the vehicle.
Further information on tires and rims is
available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. A
tire inflation pressure table is located
on the fuel filler flap of the vehicle. The
tire pressure should be checked regularly and should only be adjusted on
cold tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s
maintenance recommendation included with vehicle.
Rims and Tires
G 500
1
G 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7 /2 J x18 H2
91/2 J x 18 EH2
Wheel offset
1.69 in (43 mm)
1.97 in (50 mm)
All season tires (radial-ply tires)
265/60 R18 110V
285/55 R18 113V
329
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheels
G 500
G 55 AMG
Rims (light alloy)
7 /2 J x18 H2
81/2 J x18 H2
Wheel offset
1.69 in (43 mm)
1.89 in (48 mm)
All season tires (radial-ply tires)
265/60 R18 110V
265/60 R18 110V M+S
330
1
Technical data
Electrical system
왔 Electrical system
G 500
G 55 AMG
Generator (alternator)
14 V/150 A
14 V/150 A
Starter motor
12 V/1.7 kW
12 V/1.7 kW
Battery
12 V/90 Ah
12 V/90 Ah
Spark plugs
Bosch F 8 DPER
Beru 14 FGH 8 DPUR X 2
NGK PFR5R-11
Electrode gap
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque
15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
331
Technical data
Main dimensions, vehicle weights and ratings
왔 Main dimensions, vehicle weights and ratings
Main dimensions
G 500
G 55 AMG
Overall vehicle length
(inc. spare wheel)
185.6 in (4715 mm)
185.6 in (4715 mm)
Overall vehicle width
71.3 in (1811 mm)
73.4 in (1864 mm)
Overall vehicle height
77.8 in (1977 mm)
77.8 in (1977 mm)
Wheel base
112.2 in (2850 mm)
112.2 in (2850 mm)
Ground clearance
8.3 in (211 mm)
8.3 in (211 mm)
Turning radius
523.6 in (13.3 m)
523.6 in (13.3 m)
Track, front and rear
59.6 in (1515 mm)
59.1 in (1501 mm)
G 500
G 55 AMG
6615 lbs (3000 kg)
6615 lbs (3000 kg)
3110 lbs (1410 kg)
3110 lbs (1410 kg)
3965 lbs (1800 kg)
3965 lbs (1800 kg)
Vehicle weights and ratings
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
1
Gross Axle Weight Rating, front
2
2
Gross Axle Weight Rating, rear
1
GVWR is the maximum permissible vehicle weight. Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed accessories,
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It must never exceed the GVWR.
2
GAWR is the maximum permissible axle weight.
332
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities
Therefore use only brands tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match.
Engine with oil filter
Please refer to the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Model
Capacity
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
G 500
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
Approved engine oils
G 55 AMG
8.0 US qt (7.5 l)
Automatic transmission
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
MB Automatic Transmission Oil
Transfer case
2.96 US qt (2.8 l)
MB part no. A 001 989 28 03 10
Differential lock mechanism
0.47 - 0.63 US qt
(0.45 - 0.6 l)
Brake fluid DOT 3+4, SAE J1703
Front axle
1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
Rear axle
1.9 US qt (1.8 l)
Hypoid gear oil SAE 90, 85 W 90
Power steering
approx. 1.06 US qt (1.0 l)
MB Power Steering Fluid, or
approved Dexron III ATF
Front wheel hubs
approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Fuel tank
including a reserve of
25.4 US gal (96.0 l)
5.3 US gal (20.0 l)
Premium unleaded gasoline:
Posted Octane 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON)
333
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model
Cooling system
Capacity
approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
Air conditioning system
R-134a refrigerant and
special PAG lubricant oil (never R-12)
Windshield/rear window washer system
and headlamp cleaning system
1
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
approx. 7.9 US qt (7.5 l)
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
and water1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and water for temperatures above freezing point or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S” and commercially available
premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 339).
Engine oils
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines. Therefore, use
only engine oils recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Information on approved
engine oils is available in the Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet, or at
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
334
!
Always check the oil filler cap
(컄 page 232) for important information pertaining to the engine oil needing to meet a specific Mercedes-Benz
specification (e.g. MB 229.5). If such
information is printed on the oil filler
cap, only use an engine oil from the list
of approved engine oils in the Factory
Approved Service Products pamphlet
that meets the specification indicated
on the oil filler cap.
Using engine oils of other specification
may cause the FSS to incorrectly determine the next service interval and will
result in engine damage not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Please follow the FSS and Service Booklet
recommendations for scheduled oil changes. Failure to do so could result in engine
damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Engine oil additives
Brake fluid
Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point
of the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from
the atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous operating conditions, this moisture
content can lead to the formation of bubbles in the system, thus reducing the system’s efficiency.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
blending oil additives are not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Air conditioning refrigerant
R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil is used in the air conditioning system.
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced every two years, preferably in the
spring.
Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Only brake fluid approved by
Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will provide you with additional
information.
Premium unleaded gasoline
!
To maintain the engine’s durability and
performance, premium unleaded gasoline must be used. If premium unleaded
is not available and low octane fuel is
used, follow these precautions:
앫
Have the fuel tank only partially
filled with unleaded regular and fill
up with premium unleaded as soon
as possible.
앫
Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
앫
Do not exceed an engine speed of
3000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded
with a light load such as two persons and no luggage.
앫
Do not exceed 2⁄3 of maximum accelerator pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or operating in
mountainous terrain.
335
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Fuel requirements
Gasoline additives
Use only premium unleaded meeting
ASTM standard D 439:
A major concern among engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
use of quality gasoline containing additives
that prevent the build up of carbon deposits.
앫
The octane number (posted at the
pump) must be 91 min. It is an average
of both the Research (R) octane number and the Motor (M) octane number:
(R+M)/2). This is also known as the
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
used provided the ratio of any one of these
oxygenates to gasoline does not exceed
10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
used.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
336
After an extended period of using fuels
without such additives, carbon deposits
can build up especially on the intake valves
and in the combustion area, leading to engine performance problems such as:
앫
Warm-up hesitation
앫
Unstable idle
앫
Knocking/pinging
앫
Misfire
앫
Power loss
Do not blend other specific fuel additives
with fuel. This only results in unnecessary
cost and may be harmful to the engine operation.
Damage or malfunctions resulting from
poor fuel quality or from blending specific
fuel additives are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Coolants
The engine coolant is a mixture of water
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
앫
Corrosion protection
앫
Freeze protection
앫
Boiling protection (by increasing the
boiling point)
The cooling system was filled at the factory
with a coolant providing freeze protection
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corrosion protection.
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to
-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the coolant in the pressurized cooling system is
reached at approximately 266°F (130°C).
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
The coolant solution must be used year
round to provide the necessary corrosion
protection and increase in the boil-over
protection. Refer to Service Booklet for replacement interval.
To provide important corrosion protection,
the solution must be at least 45% anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
Therefore, do not use more than this
amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
If the coolant level is low, water and MB
anticorrosion/antifreeze should be used
to bring it up to the proper level (have cooling system checked for signs of leakage).
Please make sure the mixture is in accordance with label instructions.
The water in the cooling system must meet
minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, consult your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. The use of aluminum components in motor vehicle engines
necessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze
coolant used in such engines be specifically formulated to protect the aluminum
parts. (Failure to use such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in a significantly shortened service life.)
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
Mercedes-Benz anticorrosion/antifreeze
agent.
337
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Before the start of the winter season (or
once a year in hot southern regions), you
should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked. The coolant is also
regularly checked each time you bring your
vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for service.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model
G 500/
G 55 AMG
338
Approx. freeze protection
– 35°F (– 37°C)
– 49°F (– 45°C)
6.35 US qt (6.0 l)
7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
Technical data
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Windshield/rear window washer system and headlamp cleaning system
The windshield washer reservoir is located
in the engine compartment on the front
passenger side. It holds approximately
5.3 US qt (5.0 l). The headlamp cleaning
system is also supplied from the windshield washer reservoir.
왘
Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “S” to and water
(or concentrate and commercially
available premixed windshield washer
solvent/antifreeze, depending on ambient temperatures) (컄 page 339).
Warning!
G
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
Washer fluid mixing ratio
For temperatures above freezing point use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and water:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts water
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) water]
For temperatures below freezing point use
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “S”
and commercially available premixed
windshield washer solvent/antifreeze:
앫
1 part “S” to 100 parts solvent
[40 ml “S” to 1 gallon (4 liters) solvent]
339
Technical data
Consumer information
왔 Consumer information
This has been prepared as required of all
manufacturers of passenger cars under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations,
Part 575 pursuant to the “National Traffic
and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found, where applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Tread wear
Traction
Temperature
200
AA
A
All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
340
Tread wear
Traction
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one-half (11⁄2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning!
G
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Technical data
Consumer information
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level
of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
Warning!
G
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
excessive heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
341
342
Technical terms
ABS
(Antilock Brake System)
Prevents the wheels from locking up
during braking so that the vehicle can
continue to be steered.
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system
This system detects if a special system
compatible child restraint seat is installed on the front passenger seat. The
system will automatically deactivate
the passenger front airbag when such a
seat is properly installed (indicator
lamp 7 in the center console
comes on). See your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
availability.
BabySmartTM compatible child seats
Special restraint system for children.
The sensor system for the passenger
seat prevents deployment of the passenger front airbag if a BabySmartTM
compatible child seat is installed.
BAS
(Brake Assist System)
System for potentially reducing braking
distances in emergency braking situations. The system is activated when it
senses an emergency based on how
fast the brake is applied.
CAC
(Customer Assistance Center)
Mercedes-Benz customer service center, which can help you with any questions about your vehicle and provide
assistance in the event of a breakdown.
CAN system
(Controller Area Network)
Data bus network serving to control vehicle functions such as door locking or
windshield wiping.
COMAND
(Cockpit Management and Data System)
Information and operating center for
vehicle sound and communications
systems, including the radio and the
navigation system, as well as other optional equipment (CD changer, telephone, etc.).
Control system
The control system is used to call up
vehicle information and to change
component settings. Information and
messages appear in the multifunction
display. The driver uses the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel to
navigate through the system and to adjust settings.
Cockpit
All instruments, switches, buttons and
indicator/warning lamps in the passenger compartment needed for vehicle
operation and monitoring.
343
Technical terms
Differential locks
On slippery surfaces, differential locks
prevent one wheel of an axle from spinning while the other wheel stands still,
resulting in driving force no longer being transferred.
Cruise control
Driving convenience system for automatically maintaining the vehicle speed
set by the driver.
Engine number
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the cylinder block to
uniquely identify each engine produced.
Engine oil viscosity
Measurement for the inner friction (viscosity) of the oil at different temperatures. The higher the temperature an
oil can tolerate without becoming thin,
or the lower the temperature it can tolerate without becoming viscous, the
better the viscosity.
344
ESP
(Electronic Stability Program)
Improves vehicle handling and directional stability.
ETD
(Emergency Tensioning Device)
Device which deploys in certain frontal
and rear collisions exceeding the system's threshold to tighten the seat
belts.
->SRS
FSS
(Flexible Service System)
Service indicator in the speedometer
display that informs the driver when
the next vehicle maintenance service is
due.
GAWR
(Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight
on each axle must never exceed the
GAWR for the front and rear axle indicated on the certification label located
on the driver’s door pillar.
GVW
(Gross Vehicle Weight)
The GVW comprises the weight of the
vehicle including fuel, tools, spare
wheel, installed accessories, passengers and cargo. The GWV must never
exceed the GVWR indicated on the certification label located on the driver’s
door pillar.
GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
This is the maximum permissible vehicle weight. It is indicated on certification label located on the driver’s door
pillar.
Gear range
Number of gears which are available to
the automatic transmission for shifting.
The automatic gear shifting process
can be adapted to specific operating
conditions using the gear selector lever.
Technical terms
GPS
(Global Positioning System)
Satellite-based system for relaying
geographic location information to and
from vehicles equipped with special receivers. Employs CD digital maps for
navigation.
Instrument cluster
The displays and indicator/warning
lamps in the driver’s field of vision, including the tachometer, speedometer,
engine temperature and fuel gauge.
Kickdown
Depressing the accelerator past the
point of resistance shifts the transmission down to the lowest possible gear.
This very quickly accelerates the vehicle and should not be used for normal
acceleration needs.
Line of fall
The direct line that an object moves
downhill when influenced by the force
of gravity alone.
Lock button
Button on the door which indicates
whether the door is locked or unlocked. Pushing the lock button down
on an individual door from inside will
lock that door.
Memory function*
Used to store three individual seat,
steering wheel and mirror positions for
each key.
Menu
The control system displays are arranged in menus. Each menu contains
a number of commands for particular
systems. In the Audio menu, for example, you will find the commands Select
radio station or Operate CD player.
Using commands, you can directly
change the settings for your vehicle.
MON
(Motor Octane Number)
The Motor Octane Number for gasoline
as determined by a standardized method. It is an indication of a gasoline's
ability to resist undesired detonation
(knocking). The average of both the
MON (Motor Octane Number) and
->RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Multifunction display
A display field in the instrument cluster
used to present information provided
by the control system.
Overspeed range
Engine speeds within the red marking
of the tachometer dial. Avoid this engine speed range, as it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
345
Technical terms
Poly-V-belt drive
Drives engine-components (alternator,
AC compressor, etc.) from the engine.
Power train
Collective term designating all components used to generate and transmit
motive power to the drive axles, including
앫
engine
앫
clutch/torque converter
앫
transmission
앫
transfer case
앫
drive shaft
앫
differential
앫
axle shafts/axles
Rear Parking Assist*
System which uses visual and acoustic
signals to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
346
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics
Transmission of vehicle data and current location to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center for subscribers to Tele Aid service.
REST
(Residual engine heat utilization)
Feature that uses the engine heat
stored in the coolant to heat the vehicle interior for a short time after the engine has been turned off.
Restraint system
Seat belts, belt tensioner, airbags and
child seat restraint systems. As independent systems, their protective functions complement one another.
RON
(Research Octane Number)
The Research Octane Number for gasoline as determined by a standardized
method. It is an indication of a gasoline’s ability to resist undesired detonation (knocking). The average of both
the ->MON (Motor Octane Number)
and RON (Research Octane Number) is
posted at the pump, also known as
ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Shift lock
When the vehicle is parked, this lock
prevents the transmission gear selector lever from being moved out of
position P without key turned and
brake pedal depressed.
SRS
(Supplemental Restraint System)
Seat belts, emergency tensioning device and airbags. Though independent
systems, they are closely interfaced to
provide effective occupant protection.
Technical terms
Tele Aid System
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
Demand)
The Tele Aid system consists of three
types of response: automatic and manual emergency, roadside assistance
and information. Tele Aid is initially activated by completing a subscriber
agreement and placing an acquaintance call.
The Tele Aid system is operational provided that the vehicle’s battery is
charged, properly connected, not damaged and cellular and GPS coverage is
available.
Telematics*
A combination of the terms “telecommunications” and “informatics”.
Tightening torque
Force times lever arm (e.g. a lug
wrench) with which threaded fasteners
such as wheel bolts are tightened.
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
speed range for which a tire is approved.
Traction
Force exerted by the vehicle on the
road via the tires.
Transfer case
Speed of rotation/torque converter
that works together with the ->automatic transmission. In the LOW mode
off-road position, the transfer case decreases the output rotational speed of
the ->automatic transmission by approximately half. This results in a corresponding increase of torque on the
drive axles.
VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number)
The number set by the manufacturer
and placed on the body to uniquely
identify each vehicle produced.
Voice control system*
Voice control system for car phones,
portable cell phones and audio systems (radio, CD, etc.).
The vehicle then has nearly double the
driving force but drives only approximately half as fast.
347
348
Index
A
ABS 25, 74, 343
LOW RANGE mode 75
Malfunction indicator lamp 252, 253
Messages in display 261
Warning lamp 252, 253
Accelerator position, automatic
transmission 144
Accident
In case of 50
Activating
Air conditioning (cooling) 162
Air recirculation mode 160
Anti-theft alarm system 82
Central locking (control system) 133
Defrost 160
Easy-entry/exit feature 133
ESP 81
Exterior headlamps 46
Exterior lamps 105
Exterior rear view mirror parking
position 153
Hazard warning flasher 108
Headlamps 46
High beams 108
Ignition 33
Rear fog lamp 106
Rear window defroster 155
Windshield wipers 47
Adding
Coolant 233
Engine oil 231
Additional turn signals 295
Adjusting 34
Air distribution 159
Air volume 159
Backrest tilt 36
Exterior rear view mirror 38
Head restraint height 36
Head restraint height, rear seats 96
Head restraint tilt 36
Instrument cluster illumination 112
Interior rear view mirror 38
Mirrors 38
Multicontour seat* 97
Seat cushion length 97
Seat cushion tilt 36
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Seat height 36
Seats 34
Steering column in/out 37
Steering column up/down 37
Steering wheel 37
Air conditioning (cooling)
Turning off 162
Turning on 162
Air conditioning refrigerant 335
Air distribution
Adjusting 159
Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure
Air recirculation mode 160
Activating 160
Deactivating 161
349
Index
Air volume
Adjusting 159
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 259
Airbags 57
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 68, 343
Front 61
Safety guidelines 60
Alarm
Audible 73, 82
Canceling 83, 84
Visual 82
Alarm system
Anti-theft 82
Anticorrosion/antifreeze 337
Antiglare
Automatic 152
Antilock brake system (ABS) 343
Anti-theft alarm system
Arming 82
350
Canceling alarm 83
Disarming 83
Anti-theft systems 82
Anti-theft alarm system 82
Tow-away alarm 83
Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Armrest
Storage compartment below 184
Storage compartment in front of 184
Ashtrays 186
At the gas station 224
ATF (automatic transmission fluid) 232
AUDIO menu 120
Selecting radio station 121
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 152
Automatic central locking
Activating/deactivating (control
system) 133
Automatic climate control
Deactivating 162
Automatic headlamp mode 105
Automatic lighting control
Activating 109
Deactivating 109
Automatic locking when driving 91
Automatic transmission 140
Accelerator position 144
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 144
Fluid level 232
Gear ranges 142
Gear selector lever position 140, 142
Gear shifting malfunctions 144
Kickdown 144
Manual shifting 141
One-touch gearshifting 141
Transmission fluid 232
B
BabySmartTM
Airbag deactivation system 68, 343
Compatible child seats 68, 343
Self-test 68
Index
Backup lamps 296
Bulbs 296
Replacing bulbs 302
BAS 74, 76, 343
Messages in display 261
Batteries, SmartKey
Changing 288
Check lamp 87
Checking 88
Battery box
Fuse box in 319
Battery discharged
Jump starting 313
Battery, vehicle 235, 311
Charging 311
Disconnecting 312
Messages in display 265, 266
Reconnecting 312
Block heater 240
Blocking rear door window operation
71
B-pillar 326
Brake assist system (BAS) 343
Brake fluid 225, 335
Brake lamp bulbs, left and right 296
Brake lamp, high mounted 296
Brake pads
Message in display 266
Brakes 208
Warning lamp 254, 255
Break-in period 206
Brush guard* 293
Lowering 294
Raising and securing 294
Bulbs, replacing
Additional turn signals 295
Backup lamps 296, 302
Brake lamps 296, 302
Front fog lamps 295, 299
Front lamps 295
Front turn signal lamps 295, 300
High and low beam 297
High beam lamps 295
High mounted brake lamp 296
License plate lamps 296, 303
Low beam lamps 295
Parking lamps 295, 296, 297
Rear fog lamp 296, 302
Rear turn signal lamps 296
Side marker lamps 295, 300
Standing lamps 295, 296, 297
Tail lamp assemblies 296, 301
C
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) 343
Calling up
Range (distance to empty) 137
Service indicator 243
CAN system 343
Capacities
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 333
Cargo area see Cargo compartment
351
Index
Cargo compartment
Tailgate 89, 90
Tie-down rings 182
Cargo compartment cover 175
Installing 176
Removing 176
Cargo tie-down rings 182
Catalytic converter 222
CD changer 284
CD player
Operating 121
Center console 27
AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 259
Lower part 28
Upper part 27
Centigrade
Setting temperature units 127
Central locking
From inside 92
Switch 92
352
Switching on/off (control
system) 133
Unlocking from inside 92
Certification label 326
Changing
Batteries (SmartKey) 288
Key setting 133
Charging
Vehicle battery 311
CHECK ENGINE malfunction indicator
lamp 256
Checking
Coolant level 225, 232
Oil level 226, 228
Checklist
Off-road driving 215
Child safety 65
Infant and child restraint systems 56,
62, 66
LATCH child seat anchors 70
Child safety switch see Blocking of rear
door window operation
Cigarette lighter 188
Cleaning
Cup holders 248
Gear selector lever 248
Hard plastic trim items 248
Headlamps 153
Headliner 248
Illuminated door sill panels 249
Instrument cluster 248
Leather upholstery 249
Light alloy wheels 248
MB Tex upholstery 249
Plastic and rubber parts 249
Rear Parking Assist sensors* 247
Seat belts 248
Steering wheel 248
Windows 247
Windshield 48
Wiper blades 247
Wood trims 249
Index
Climate control 156
Adjusting 159, 160
Defogging windshield 160
Defrosting 160
Rear window defroster 155
Setting the temperature 158
Clock 25
Closing
Glove box 183
Hood 228
Side windows 164
Sliding/pop-up roof 166, 292
Sliding/pop-up roof with
SmartKey 167
Tailgate 90
Windows 164
Windows with SmartKey 165
Closing sliding/pop-up roof
In an emergency 292
Cockpit 22, 343
Cockpit management and data system
(COMAND) 343
COMAND 343
COMAND see separate operating instructions
Combination switch 23, 107, 108
High beam flasher 47, 108
Turn signals 46
Windshield wipers 47
Control and operation of radio
transmitters 221
Control system 115, 343
AUDIO menu 120
Convenience submenu 133
Display digital speedometer 120
Functions 116, 119
Instrument cluster submenu 127
Lighting submenu 129
Malfunction memory menu 122
Menus 118, 119, 345
Multifunction display 115
Multifunction steering wheel 116
NAVI menu 122
Selecting radio system 121
Settings menu 123
Standard display menu 120
Submenus 117, 119
TEL menu 137
Trip computer menu 136
Vehicle submenu 132
Convenience feature 165
Convenience submenu 133
Activating easy-entry/exit
feature 133
Setting key-dependency 135
Setting parking position for exterior
rear view mirror 135
Coolant 232, 336
Adding 233
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
quantity 337
Capacities 333
Checking level 232
Messages in display 268, 269
Temperature 223
Temperature display 112
Warning lamp 268
Coolant level
Checking 225, 232
353
Index
Crossing obstacles 218
Cruise control 169, 344
Canceling 170
Driving downhill 170
Driving uphill 170
Fine adjustment 171
Setting current speed 170
Setting speed 171
Cruise control lever 169
Cup holder
In rear passenger footwell 186
Cup holders 185
Cleaning 248
In front passenger footwell 185
Next to the armrest 185
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) 343
354
D
Daytime running lamp mode 106
Setting 129
Deactivating
Air conditioning (cooling) 162
Air recirculation mode 161
Alarm 83
Anti-theft alarm system 83
Central locking (control system)
Cruise control 170
Defrost 160
ESP 79
Exterior lamps 105
Exterior lamps delayed
switch-off 131
Hazard warning flasher 108
Headlamps 52
Immobilizer 82
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 132
Rear window defroster 155
Tow-away alarm 84
Deep water see Standing water
133
Defogging
Windshield 160
Defrosting 160
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lamps 131
Interior lighting 132
Dialing
A number (telephone) 139
Differential locks 148, 344
Switching off 151
Switching on 150
Difficulties
While driving see Problems while driving
With starting 44
Digital speedometer 120
Direction of rotation (tires) 237
Discharged battery
Jump starting 313
Disconnecting
Vehicle battery 312
Display
Selecting 129
Index
Displays
Digital speedometer 120
Messages 229, 260
Selecting 129
Service indicator 242
Showing malfunctions 122
Distance to empty (range)
Calling up 136
Door control panel 30
Door handle 30
Door sill panels
Cleaning 249
Door unlock
With Tele Aid 197
Doors
Message in display 271
Opening from the inside 89
Opening from the outside 87
Downhill driving
Cruise control 170
Downshifting 141
Drink holders see Cup holders
Drinking and driving 207
Driving
General instructions 40, 207
In winter 212
Problems 50
Safety systems 74
Through standing water 213
Driving abroad 222
Driving and safety systems
4-ETS 77
ABS 74
BAS 76
EBB 78
ESP 78
Driving instruction
Passenger compartment 213
Driving instructions 207
Driving off 209
Driving systems 169
Cruise control 169
Driving safety systems 74
Driving through water 217
E
Easy-entry/exit feature 94
Activating 133
Interrupting movement 134
EBB 74, 78
Electrical fuses 319
Electrical outlet 188
Electrical system
Technical data 331
Electronic Brake Booster (EBB) 78
Electronic Stability Program see ESP
Electronic Stability program see ESP
Electronic Traction System (ETS) 77
Emergency call system 190
Emergency calls
Initiating an emergency call 193
With Tele Aid 191
355
Index
Emergency operation (Limp Home
Mode) 144
Emergency operations
Closing sliding/pop-up roof 292
Locking the vehicle 288
Opening sliding/pop-up roof 292
Remote door unlock 197
Unlocking the tailgate 287
Unlocking the vehicle 287
Emergency tensioning device see ETD
Emission control 222
Emission control label 326
Ending
A call (telephone) 138
Engine
Compartment 227
Message in display 256
Starting with the key 44
Technical data 328
Turning off with the key 52
Engine cleaning 246
356
Engine compartment 227
Hood 227
Engine malfunction indicator lamp 25,
256
Engine number 344
Engine oil 228, 334
Adding 231
Additives 335, 340
Checking level 228
Consumption 228
Display messages 272
Messages in display 229, 271
Oil dipstick 232
Viscosity 344
Engine oil level see Oil level
Enlarged cargo compartment 176
ESP 25, 74, 78, 344
Messages in display 263
Switching off 79
Switching on 81
Synchronizing 263
Warning lamp 257
ETD 56, 65, 344
Safety guidelines 60
Exterior lamp switch 104
Exterior lamps
Delayed switch-off 131
Exterior rear view mirrors
Adjusting 38
Parking position for 135
F
Fahrenheit
Setting temperature units 127
Fastening the seat belts 40
Fine adjustment
Cruise control 171
First aid kit 283
Flat tire 306
Lowering the vehicle 310
Mounting the spare wheel 307
Spare wheel 285
Index
Flexible Service System (FSS) 242, 344
Fog lamp, rear 107, 296
Fog lamps, front 107
Messages in display 275
Switching on 107
4-ETS 74, 77
Front airbags 61
Front axle differential lock
Switching on 151
Front fog lamps
Replacing bulbs 295, 299
Front lamps
Messages in display 274, 276
Replacing bulbs 295, 297
Switching on 104
Front seat head restraints
Installing 95
Removing 95
Front towing eye 318
Front turn signal lamp
Replacing bulbs 300
FSS (Flexible Service System) 242, 344
Fuel 225
Additives 336
Fuel reserve warning lamp 258
Gasoline additives 336
Premium unleaded gasoline 225,
333, 335
Refueling 224
Requirements 336
Reserve warning 25
Technical data 333
Fuel additives 336
Fuel consumption statistics
After start 136
Since last reset 136
Fuel filler flap 224
Locking 224
Opening 290
Unlocking 224
Fuel requirements 336
Fuel reserve tank
Message in display 273
Fuel tank
Capacity 333
Filler flap 224
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Capacities 333
Functions (control system) 116, 119
Resetting 125
Fuse box 319, 320, 321
Fuses 319
Fuse box in battery box 319
Fuse box in front passenger
footwell 320
Fuse box in middle tunnel 321
Fuse box in passenger
compartment 319
G
Garage door opener 29, 198
Gasoline see Fuel
Gasoline additives 336
GAWR 344
357
Index
Gear range 344
Automatic transmission 142
Limiting 142
Shifting into optimal 141
Transfer case 145
Gear range limit
Canceling 141
Gear selector lever
Cleaning 248
Position 142
Position (automatic
transmission) 140
Global
Locking 87
Unlocking 87
Global Positioning System (GPS) 345
Glove box 23, 183
Closing 183
Opening 183
Good visibility 152
GPS 345
GVW 344
GVWR 344
358
H
Hard plastic trim items
Cleaning 248
Hazard warning flasher 108
Switching off 108
Switching on 108
Head restraints 95
Power seats 36
Synchronizing 95
Headlamp cleaning system 234
Headlamps
Automatic control 105
Cleaning 246
Cleaning system 153, 234
Switching off 52
Switching on 46
Washer fluid 339
Washer system 339
Headlight switch-off delay see Delayed
switch-off, exterior lamps
Headliner
Cleaning 248
Heated seats 98
Heated steering wheel 203
Height adjustment
Head restraints 36
Seat belts 42
Steering wheel 37
High beam flasher 47, 108
High beam headlamps
Messages in display 275
Replacing bulbs 295, 297
Switching on 108
High mounted brake lamp 296
Hood 227
Closing 228
Messages in display 273
Opening 227
Hydroplaning 210
Index
I
Identification labels 326
Certification label 326
Vehicle identification number
(VIN) 326
Ignition 33
Switching on 44
Immobilizer 82
Activating 82
Deactivating 82
Infant and child restraint systems 66
Installing 69
LATCH child seat anchors 70
Information
Button for Tele Aid 194
Inside rear view mirror
Antiglare 152
Installing
Cargo compartment cover 176
Infant and child restraint systems 69
Wiper blades 305
Instructions
Loading 180
Instrument cluster 24, 112, 345
Cleaning 248
Coolant temperature display 112
Illumination 112
Lamps in 258
Multifunction display 115
Outside temperature indicator 114
Selecting language 128
Instrument lighting 112
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
Interior lighting 109
Activating automatic control 109
Deactivating automatic control 109
Delayed switch-off 132
Manual operation 109
Interior rear view mirror
Adjusting 38
Interior storage spaces 183
Cup holders 185, 186
Glove box 183
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 186
Storage compartment below
armrest 184
Storage compartment in front of
armrest 184
Interval wiping 49
Switching off 49
Switching on 49
J
Jack 283, 284
Jump starting 313
K
Key positions in starter switch 33
Key, mechanical 287
Key, SmartKey
Battery check lamp 87
Changing the batteries 288
Checking the batteries 88
Factory setting 87
Global locking 87
Global unlocking 87
Loss of 88
Positions in starter switch 33
Remote controls 86
Restoring to factory setting 87
Selective setting 87
Starting the engine 44
Unlocking with 32
Key-dependency memory
Settings 135
359
Index
Keys 86
Kickdown 144, 345
Kilometers/miles in speedometer 128
Km/h or mph in speedometer 128
L
Labels, identification 326
Lamp bulbs, exterior 295
Lamps, exterior
Front 295
Light sensor 276
Messages in display 274, 276
Rear 296
Replacing bulbs for rear 301
Lamps, indicator and warning
ABS 252, 253
Battery (SmartKey) 87
Brakes 254, 255
CHECK ENGINE 256
Engine diagnostics 256
ESP 257
Fuel reserve 258
Instrument cluster 258
Seat belts 258
Service indicator 242
SRS 57
Turn signals 25
360
Language
Multifunction display 128
Setting 128
LATCH child seat anchors 70
Layout of poly-V-belt drive 327
Leather upholstery
Cleaning 249
License plate lamps
Messages in display 276
Replacing bulbs 296, 303
Light alloy wheels
Cleaning 248
Technical data 329, 330
Light sensor 276
Lighter see Cigarette lighter
Lighting 104
Automatic headlamp mode 105
Combination switch 108
Daytime running lamp mode 106
Exterior lamp switch 104
Front fog lamps 107
High beam flasher 108
High beams 108
Instrument cluster illumination 112
Interior 109
Locator lighting 106
Low beams 104
Manual headlamp mode 105
Night security illumination 106
Parking lamps 104
Rear fog lamp 107
Settings (control system) 129
Limiting the gear range 142
Limp Home Mode 144
Line of fall 345
Loading 175
Cargo compartment cover 175
Cargo tie-down rings 182
Instructions 180
Partition net* 178
Roof rack 175
Split rear bench seat 176
Locator lighting 106
Setting 130
Index
Lock button 345
Locking 51, 86
Fuel filler flap 224
Global, SmartKey 87
Separately the tailgate 90
Vehicle in an emergency 288
Loss of keys 88
Loss of Service and Warranty Information
Booklet 325
Low beam headlamps
Messages in display 276
Replacing bulbs 295, 297
LOW RANGE - ABS 75
Lowering
Vehicle 310
Lubricants
Technical data 333
M
Main dimensions 332
Maintenance 242
Malfunction
Displaying 122
Rear Parking Assist* 174
Malfunction memory 122
Calling up 122
Clearing 123
Manual headlamp mode 105
Manual operations
Fuel filler flap 290
Interior lighting control 109
Locking the tailgate 90
Locking the vehicle 288
Sliding/pop-up roof 292
Unlocking the driver’s door 287
Unlocking the tailgate 91, 287
Unlocking transmission gear selector
lever 290
MB Tex upholstery
Cleaning 249
Mechanical key 287
Memory function 101, 345
Recalling positions from
memory 102
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking positions 103
Storing key dependent settings 102
Menus 116
AUDIO 120
Control system 345
In control system 118, 119
Malfunction memory 122
NAVI 122
Settings menu 123
Standard display 120
Submenus 117
TEL 137
Trip computer 136
Messages in the multifunction display
Symbol messages 265
Text messages 261
Middle tunnel
Fuse box in 321
Miles/kilometers in speedometer
Setting 128
361
Index
Mirrors
Activating exterior rear view mirror
parking position 153
Adjusting 38
Automatic antiglare for rear view
mirror 152
Exterior rear view mirror 38
Exterior rear view mirror parking
positions 135
Interior rear view mirror 38
Storing exterior rear view mirror parking position 103
MON 225
MON (Motor Octane Number) 345
Monitoring reach
Rear Parking Assist* 173
Mph or km/h in speedometer
setting 128
Multicontour seat* 97
Multifunction display 115, 345
Selecting language 128
Standard display 119
362
Multifunction display messages
ABS 261
BAS 261
Battery 265, 266
Brake fluid 266
Brake pads 266
Check engine 256
Coolant 268, 269
Display 282
Doors 271
Engine 256
Engine oil level 271
ESP 263
Fuel reserve tank 273
Hood 273
Key 273
Lamps 274, 276
Parking brake 267
Sunroof 281
Tailgate 282
Tele Aid 281
Telephone* 281
Washer fluid 282
Multifunction steering wheel 26, 116
Buttons 116
N
Navigation system
Operating 122
See separate COMAND operating instructions
Night security illumination 106
Setting 131
O
Occupant safety 56
Airbags 57
Children in the vehicle 65
Fastening the seat belt 40
Infant and child restraint systems
LATCH child seat anchors 70
Seat belts 40, 60
Odometer, main 25
Off-road driving 213
Checklist 215
Crossing obstacles 218
Driving through water 217
Returning 220
Rules 214
Special driving features 214
Steep terrain 216
66
Index
Oil
Adding 231
Consumption 228
Dipstick 228
Oil dipstick 232
Viscosity 344
Oil level
Checking 226
One-touch gearshifting 141
Canceling gear range limit 141
Downshifting 141
Upshifting 141
Opening
Ashtray 186
Doors from the inside 89
Fuel filler flap 224
Fuel filler flap manually 290
Glove box 183
Hood 227
Side windows 164
Sliding/pop-up roof 166, 292
Sliding/pop-up roof in an
emergency 292
Sliding/pop-up roof with
SmartKey 167
Tailgate 89, 90
Windows 164
Windows with SmartKey 165
Operating
CD player 121
COMAND see separate operating instructions
Navigation system 122
Radio 121
Radio transmitters 221
Telephone 137
Operator’s Manual 10
Ornamental moldings 246
Outside temperature indicator 114
Overdue service 242
Overhead control panel 29
Overspeed range 345
P
Paintwork 245
Panic alarm 73
Panic button on SmartKey 73
Parcel net
In front passenger footwell 186
Parking 51, 209
Parking brake 44, 51
Engaging 51
Message in display 267
Releasing 44
Parking lamp, front
Replacing bulbs 297
Parking lamps
Replacing bulbs 295, 296
Switching on 104
Parking position
Exterior rear view mirrors 103, 135,
153
Parktronic see Rear Parking Assist*
Partition net* 178
Installing behind front seats 179
Installing behind rear seat bench 178
Removing 180
Parts see Spare parts service
363
Index
Passenger compartment 213
Fuse box in 319
Interior lighting 109
Interior rear view mirror 38
Parcel net in front passenger
footwell 186
Passenger footwell
Fuse box in 320
Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Pedals 207
Phone book
Loading 139
Quick search 139
Phone number
Dialing 139
Redialing 139
Plastic and rubber parts
Cleaning 249
Poly-V-belt drive 346
Layout 327
Positions (Memory function)
Recalling from memory 102
Storing into memory 102
364
Power assistance 208
Power seat
Adjusting backrest tilt 36
Adjusting head restraint height 36
Adjusting head restraint tilt 36
Adjusting seat cushion tilt 36
Adjusting seat height 36
Seat fore and aft adjustment 35
Power train 346
Power windows 164
Blocking of rear door window
operation 71
Convenience feature 165
Side windows 164
Summer opening feature 165
Power-washer 245
Practical hints
First aid kit 283
Fuses 319
Lamp in center console 259
Lamps in instrument cluster 252
Messages in the display 260
Spare wheel 285
Towing the vehicle 315
Vehicle jack 284
Vehicle tool kit 283
Premium unleaded gasoline
Problems
While driving 50
Product information 9
Q
Quick search
Phone book
335
139
R
Radio
Selecting stations 121
Station search 121
Station selection setting 132
Radio transmitters, control and
operation 221
Range (distance to empty)
Calling up 137
Range of sensor
Rear Parking Assist* 173
Reading lamp 29
Rear axle differential lock
Switching on 151
Rear bench seat
Foldable 176
Rear door window
Blocking operation 71
Index
Rear fog lamp
Replacing bulbs 302
Switching on 107
Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Rear Parking Assist* 172, 346
Cleaning sensors 247
Malfunction 174
Monitoring reach 173
Warning indicators 174
Rear seat head restraints 96
Installing 96
Removing 96
Rear towing eye 318
Rear view mirror automatic antiglare 152
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors
Rear window defroster 155
Activating 155
Deactivating 155
Rear window wiper/washer 49
Reconnecting
Vehicle battery 312
Refrigerant
Air conditioning 335
Refueling 224
Regular checks 225
Remote controls
SmartKey 86
Remote door unlock
With Tele Aid 197
Remote Vehicle Diagnostics 346
Removing
Cargo compartment cover 176
Wheel 309
Wiper blades 304
Replacing
Brake lamp bulbs 296
Bulbs 295
Front lamp bulbs 297
Rear lamp bulbs 296, 301
Wiper blades 304
Resetting
All functions (control system) 123
All functions of a submenu 125
Fuel consumption 136
Service indicator (FSS) 243
Trip odometer 113
Residual heat utilization 346
REST (Residual engine heat
utilization) 346
Restraint systems 56, 346
Airbags 56
Child seat recognition 56
Child seats 56
Emergency Tensioning Device
(ETD) 56
Lower anchors and tethers for children
(LATCH) 56
Seat belts 56
Restraint systems see Infant and child restraint systems
Returning from off-road driving 220
Rims 329
Roadside Assistance
Tele Aid 193
365
Index
RON 225
RON (Research Octane Number)
Roof rack 175
Rotating wheels 238
Rubber parts
Cleaning 249
S
Safety
Occupant 56
Safety belts see Seat belts
Safety systems
Driving 74
Searching
Radio station 121
Seat adjustment
Synchronizing 95
Seat backrest
Folding forward 177
Returning to sitting position
Seat belt force limiter 65
366
346
177
Seat belt height adjustment 42
Seat belts 56, 62
Cleaning 248
Fastening 40
Height adjustment 42
Proper use of 42, 64
Safety guidelines 60
Warning lamp 258
Seat bench
Folding forward 177
Returning to sitting position 177
Seat cushion length
Adjusting 97
Seats 94
Adjusting 34
Easy entry/exit feature 94
Heater 98
Multicontour seat* 97
Split rear bench seat 176
Selecting
Display 129
Selector lever 25
Lock 43
Position (automatic transmission) 25
Self-test
BabySmartTM airbag deactivation
system 68
Tele Aid 191
Service
Calling up the service indicator 243
Major service (Service B) 242
Minor service (Service A) 242
Overdue 242
Spare parts 324
Types 242
When due 242
Service and Warranty Booklet
Loss of 325
Service indicator 242
Calling up 243
Clearing 242, 243
Index
Service life (tires) 237
Service System see FSS
Setting
Clock 25
Convenience functions 133
Cruise control 170
Daytime running lamp mode 129
Higher speed in cruise control 171
Individual vehicle settings 123
Instrument lighting 112
Interior lighting delayed
switch-off 132
Key-dependent memory 135
Lamps and lighting (control
system) 129
Language, multifunction display 128
Locator lighting 130
Lower speed in cruise control 171
Miles/kilometers in
speedometer 128
Night security illumination 131
Parking position for exterior rear view
mirrors 135
Slower speed in cruise control 171
Speed in cruise control 171
Speedometer display mode 128
Station selection mode 132
Temperature (interior) 158
Temperature indicator 127
Time display mode 127
Units
Speedometer 128
Temperature 127
Time 127
Setting current speed 170
Settings
Convenience functions 133
Factory, SmartKey 87
Individual (SmartKey) 135
Lighting (control system) 129
Menus and submenus 117
Resetting all (control system) 123
Resetting in the submenu 125
Selective 87
Settings menu
Functions in 123
Individual vehicle settings 123
Submenus 124
Shift lock 346
Shifting
Gear selector lever positions 142
Shifting into optimal
Gear range 141
Side marker lamps 296
Replacing bulbs 295, 300
Side markers
Cleaning 246
Side windows
Automatic opening 164
Cleaning 247
Closing 164, 165
Closing with SmartKey 165
Opening 164, 165
Opening fully 164
Opening with SmartKey 165
Stopping 164
367
Index
Signal strength (telephone) 138
Simultaneous wiping and washing
Windshield wipers 48
Single wipe 48
Sliding/pop-up roof 166
Closing 166, 292
Closing with SmartKey 167
Opening 166, 292
Opening with SmartKey 167
Stopping 167
SmartKey 86
Locking and unlocking 86
Opening and closing the sliding/pop-up roof with 167
Opening and closing windows
with 165
Unlocking with 32
Snow chains 241
Spare parts service 324
Spare wheel 285
368
Mounting 307
Speed
Setting current 170
Speed settings
Cruise control 171
Speedometer 25
Setting units 128
Speedometer display mode
Selecting 128
Split rear bench seat 176
SRS 64, 346
Indicator lamp 258
Standing lamp, front
Replacing bulbs 297
Standing lamps
Replacing bulbs 295, 296
Standing water
Driving instructions 213
Starter switch 23, 33
Positions 33
Starting difficulties 44
Starting position 33
Starting the engine 43
Station (radio)
Search 121
Station selection
Setting 132
Steep terrain 216
Steering column
Adjusting in /out 37
Adjusting up/down 37
Steering wheel
Adjusting 37
Adjusting in/out 37
Adjusting up/down 37
Buttons 26
Cleaning 248
Heated 203
Stolen vehicle
Tracking services 197
Index
Stopping
Sliding/pop-up roof 167
Windows 164
Storage compartments
Armrest 184
Glove box 183
Storage spaces
Cup holders 184
Storing (Memory function)
Positions into memory 102
Submenus
Convenience 133
For settings 117
In control system 119
Instrument cluster 127
Lighting 129
Resetting functions in Control
system 125
Selecting 124
Settings menu 124
Vehicle 132
Summer opening feature 165
Sun visors 154
Sunroof
Messages in display 281
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) 346
Switching
Transfer case 145
Switching off
Automatic central locking (control
system) 133
Delayed (exterior lamps) 131
Differential locks 151
Engine 52
ESP 79
Hazard warning flasher 108
Headlamps 52
Heated steering wheel 203
Switching on
Automatic central locking (control
system) 133
Differential locks 150
ESP 81
Front axle differential lock 151
Front fog lamps 107
Hazard warning flasher 108
Headlamps 46
Heated steering wheel 203
High beams 108
Rear axle differential lock 151
Rear fog lamp 107
Transfer case differential lock 150
Windshield wipers 47
Symbol messages
Multifunction display 265
Synchronizing
ESP 263
Head restraints 95
Seat adjustment 95
T
Tachometer 25, 113
Displaying gear range 142
Overspeed range 113
369
Index
Tail lamps 301
Cleaning 246
Replacing bulbs 296
Tailgate
Closing 90
Message in display 282
Opening 89, 90
Separately locking 90
Separately unlocking 91
Tailgate lock 284
Unlocking in an emergency 287
Tar stains 245
Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant 335
Brake fluid 335
Coolant 333
Coolants 336
Electrical system 331
Engine 328
Engine oil 334
370
Engine oil additives 335, 340
Fuel requirements 336
Fuels 333
Gasoline additives 336
Lubricants 333
Main dimensions 332
Premium unleaded gasoline 335
Rims and tires 329
Weights and ratings 332
Windshield and headlamp washer
system 334, 339
Tele Aid 190
Emergency calls 191
Information 194
Initiating an emergency call
manually 193
Messages in display 281
Remote door unlock 197
Roadside Assistance 193
Stolen vehicle tracking services 197
System self-check 191
Tele Aid System 190
Upgrade signals 196
Tele Aid System 347
Telematics* 347
Telephone
Answering a call 138
Dialing a number from the phone
book 139
Ending a call 138
Loading phone book 139
Operating 137
Redialing 139
Telephone* 26, 189
Messages in display 281
Temperature
Display mode 127
Grades of tires 341
Setting interior temperature 158
Setting units in display 127
Tires 238
Text messages
Multifunction display 261
Tie-down rings (Cargo
compartment) 182
Tightening torque 347
Index
Tightening torque (Wheel bolts)
Time
Setting display mode 127
Time display mode
Setting 127
Tire inflation pressure
Checking 237
Tire speed rating 211, 347
Tire traction 211
Tires 236, 329
Direction of rotation 237
Driving instructions 210
Retreads 236
Rims and tires 329
Service life 237
Temperature 238
Temperature grades 341
Tread depth 240
Wear pattern 238
Winter 240
310
Tools 283
Tow-away alarm 27, 83
Arming 83
Disarming 83
Disarming for transport 83
Tow-away alarm system
Canceling alarm 84
Towing eye, front 318
Towing eye, rear 318
Towing the vehicle 315
Stranded vehicle 318
Towing the vehicle - various problem
scenarios 317
Tracking services
For stolen vehicle 197
Traction 340, 347
Transfer case 145, 347
Gear range 145
Messages in the multifunction
display 146
Switching 145
Transfer case differential lock
Switching on 150
Transmission gear selector lever 290
Unlocking manually 290
Transmission see Automatic transmission
Tread depth (tires) 240
Treadwear 340
Trip computer 136
Trip odometer
Resetting 113
Trunk see Cargo compartment
Turn signal lamps
Replacing bulbs 295, 296
Turn signals 23, 46
Additional in mirrors 295
Cleaning lenses 246
Front bulbs 295
Indicator lamps 25
Rear bulbs 296
Turning off
Engine 52
371
Index
U
Units
Setting speedometer units 128
Setting temperature units 127
Setting time units 127
Unlocking 32, 86
Driver’s door in an emergency 287
Fuel filler flap 224
Global 87
In an emergency 287
Selective settings 87
Separately the tailgate 91
Tailgate in an emergency 287
Transmission gear selector lever
manually 290
Vehicle in an emergency 197
With the SmartKey 32
Upgrade signals
Tele Aid 196
372
Uphill driving
Cruise control 170
Upshifting 141
Useful features 183
Ashtrays 186
Cigarette lighter 188
Electrical outlet 188
Interior storage spaces
Tele Aid 190
Telephone* 189
183
V
Vehicle
Individual settings 123, 126
Locking 27
Locking in an emergency 288
Lowering 310
Service battery 311
Towing 315
Unlocking 27
Unlocking in an emergency 287
Vehicle battery 311
Vehicle care 244
Cup holders 248
Engine cleaning 246
Gear selector lever 248
Hard plastic trim items 248
Headlamps 246
Instrument cluster 248
Leather upholstery 249
Light alloy wheels 248
MB Tex upholstery 249
Ornamental moldings 246
Paintwork 245
Plastic and rubber parts 249
Power-washer 245
Seat belts 248
Side markers 246
Steering wheel 248
Tail lamps 246
Tar stains 245
Index
Turn signals 246
Vehicle washing 246
Window cleaning 247
Wiper blades 247
Wood trims 249
Vehicle identification number (VIN) 326
Vehicle jack 284
Vehicle tool kit 283
Vehicle washing 246
VIN (Vehicle Identification Number) 326,
347
Voice control system* 347
W
Warning indicators
Rear Parking Assist* 174
Warning sounds
Drivers seat belts 62
Exterior lighting 105
Parking brake 45
Warranty coverage 325
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
Washing the vehicle 245
Wear pattern (tires) 238
Weights and ratings 332
Wheel change
Tightening torque 310
Wheels
Rotating 238
Tires and wheels 236
Windows see Side windows
Windshield
Defogging 160
Replacing wiper blades 304
Washer fluid 234, 339
Washer system 339
Windshield washer fluid 339
Message in display 282
Mixing ratio 339
Refilling 234
Wiping with 48
Windshield washer system 339
Windshield wipers 23, 47
Fast wiper speed 47
Interval wiping 49
Rear window wiper/washer 49
Replacing wiper blades 304
Single wipe 48
Switching on 47
Wiping with windshield washer
fluid 48
Winter driving 240
Block heater 240
Snow chains 241
Tires 240
Winter driving instructions 212
Winter tires 240
Wiper blades
Cleaning 247
Installing 305
Removing 304
Replacing 304
Wiper/washer
Rear window 49
373
Index
Wiping
And washing simultaneously 48
Interval 47, 49
With windshield washer fluid 48
Wood trims
Cleaning 249
374
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality service, see your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
G
Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We reserve the right to modify the technical details of the vehicle as given in the data and illustrations of this Operator’s Manual.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our prior authorization in writing.
Title illustration no. P00.01-2285-31
Press time 08/20/03
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany
Download PDF

advertising